JP7434806B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball firing means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a firing operation by a player. When a game ball fired from a game ball launcher enters a ball entry section provided in a game area, a privilege such as a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-074175

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably improve the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A game machine comprising a game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows downward is formed, and a game ball firing means capable of firing a game ball into the game area,
a predetermined ball entry means provided in the gaming area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
special information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
special information determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information;
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game recurring operation is started, and the game recurring operation is started as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. a game round control means that controls a notification means so that the game round operation is performed with the completion of the game round as one game round;
The game state is set to a predetermined value when the determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game time control means. and means capable of transitioning from a gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
means capable of transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the winning result;
Equipped with
It is possible to execute a specific performance in a predetermined game round that corresponds to the predetermined number of times in the second gaming state and in which the determination result by the special information determining means is a non-winning result. ,
When transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state and transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information carried over, the more advantageous it can be to the player.
means for causing a first performance to be executed in the predetermined game round when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has reached an upper limit;
means for executing a second performance in the predetermined game round when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached an upper limit;
Equipped with
The second performance includes the execution of a predetermined notification that can suggest the firing of a game ball toward the predetermined ball entering means, and the first performance does not include the execution of the predetermined notification. Features.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the main configuration of a pachinko machine developed. (a) is a front view showing the configuration of the game board, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a game round. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port in a closed state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second operating port in an open state. (a) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in a closed state, and (b) is a sectional view of the first variable winning device in an open state. (a) is a vertical sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the side, and (b) is a vertical sectional view of the second variable winning device as seen from the back side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. It is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents on a display screen of a pattern display device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning/losing lottery and the like. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the validity table for the first operation port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the validity table for the second operation port. (a) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the jackpot type and the number of time saving times. (a) is an explanatory diagram of a special winning type table for the first operating port, and (b) is an explanatory diagram of the special winning type table for the second operating port. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the types of V jackpots, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the V jackpot types and the number of time saving times. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a low frequency winning mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a high frequency winning mode. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the operating port. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows processing for confirmation display. It is a flow chart showing transition processing to a special winning game state. It is a flowchart showing special winning opening/closing processing. It is a flowchart showing the end processing of the special winning game. It is a flowchart which shows V distribution setting processing. It is a flow chart showing V winning processing. It is a flowchart showing transition processing to a jackpot gaming state. It is a flowchart showing transition processing when the jackpot game state ends. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for ending high-frequency support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. It is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state, the support mode, and the variable display mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram comparing the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram illustrating the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram showing changes in stay mode as the game progresses. It is a schematic diagram showing changes in stay mode as the game progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special endings performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device. It is a schematic diagram showing an outline of right hit notification. It is a flowchart which shows the process for 1st special production modes performed by MPU of a notification/production control device. It is a flowchart which shows challenge performance progress processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a first half part. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to a latter half part. It is a flowchart which shows the preliminary confirmation process for the 1st operation opening performed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the preliminary confirmation process for the 2nd actuation opening performed by MPU of a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the number calculation process of consecutive winnings. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between pending information and the number of consecutive wins. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between pending information and the number of consecutive wins. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between pending information and the number of consecutive wins. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a latter part. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a loss result. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of performance in the case of a losing result. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a winning result. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of performance in the case of a winning result. It is a schematic diagram showing the flow of performance in the case of a winning result. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a flowchart showing the winning result processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the difference in right-handed hitting notification. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge performance progress process performed by MPU of a notification/performance control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows challenge production end processing. It is a flowchart showing the jackpot game state processing executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the right hit notification process corresponding to the second special performance mode, which is executed by the MPU of the notification/performance control device in the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram showing the difference in right-handed hitting notification. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game. It is a schematic diagram showing the difference between the variable display mode of symbols in the first variable display mode and the variable display mode of symbols in the second special variable display mode in the fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advance notification process corresponding to the 2nd special production mode performed by MPU of a notification/production control device. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of advance notification. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter referred to as a "pachinko machine"), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main components of the pachinko machine 10 developed. In addition, in FIG. 2, illustration of the structure within the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

The pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body 12 attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable forward. The game machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 11 with one of the right and left sides as a support side. Further, a front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable forward with one of the left and right sides as a support side. Further, a back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and is rotatable rearward with one of the left and right sides as a support side.

Note that the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip. This locking device 16 has a function of locking the game machine main body 12 against the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and also locks the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. It has a function. Each locked state is released by performing an unlocking operation using an unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided in an exposed manner on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

A window portion 61 is formed in the front door frame 14 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 so that almost the entire area of a gaming area, which will be described later, can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 62 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is made of glass and is colorless and transparent, it is not limited thereto, and may be made of synthetic resin and colorless and transparent.

Around the window section 61, light emitting means such as various lamp sections are provided. A display light emitting section 63 is provided above the window section 61 as a part of the various lamp sections. Further, on both the left and right sides of the display light emitting section 63, speaker sections 64 are provided to output sound effects and the like according to the game situation.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulge portion 65 and a lower bulge portion 66, each bulging toward the front side, are arranged vertically in parallel. An upper plate 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower plate 72 that similarly opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper tray 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls put out from the payout device 96 provided on the back pack unit 15, and guiding them to the game ball firing mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper tray 71.

A firing handle 60 is provided on the right side of the lower plate 72 in the front door frame 14. By operating the firing handle 60, a game ball is fired toward the game area PE from the game ball firing mechanism 53 provided below the game area PE in the inner frame 13. In this case, by changing the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 60, the firing strength, that is, the firing momentum of the game ball fired toward the game area PE is changed. In this pachinko machine 10, when the firing handle 60 is operated by the player, the game ball firing mechanism 53 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the gaming area PE every 0.6 seconds. Ru.

The game area PE is formed on a game board 24 mounted on the inner frame 13. The configuration of the game board 24 will be explained below based on FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 24.

An inner rail part and an outer rail part are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PE, and the game board 24 is partitioned by the inner rail part and the outer rail part. A gaming area PE is formed. In addition, these inner rail portions and outer rail portions constitute a guide rail 54 for guiding game balls to the game area PE, and game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 53 when the player rotates the firing handle 60 are , is guided to the upper part of the game area PE by the guide rail 54.

The guide rail 54 is formed such that its exit portion faces toward the upper center of the game area PE on one side of the game area PE. Therefore, as the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60 by the player increases, the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area PE changes from the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is formed to the opposite side. Shifting to the side. Note that the exit portion of the guide rail 54 is provided on the left side of the gaming area PE.

In the range defined as the game area PE on the game board 24, a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front and back direction are formed by router processing. Each opening includes a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32A, a second variable winning device 32B, a first operating opening (or first starting ball entering section) 33, and a second operating opening (or second starting ball entering section). 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, an operating port display section 43 as a main display section, a through gate display section 44 as an accessory display section, and the like. Note that a plurality of general winning holes 31 are provided.

Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the payout of the game ball is not executed. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) Payout is executed. Specifically, when a ball enters the first operating port 33, four balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 34, one ball is delivered. When a ball enters the general winning hole 31, ten prize balls are paid out. In addition, when a ball enters the first variable winning device 32A, 15 prize balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second variable winning device 32B, 3 prize balls are paid out. is paid out.

However, the number of these prize balls is arbitrary; for example, the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33 and the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same, or the number of prize balls related to the second operating port 34 may be the same. The number of prize balls related to this may be larger than the number of prize balls related to the first operating port 33. Further, the number of prize balls related to the first variable winning device 32A may be the same as or smaller than the number of prize balls related to other operating ports or the like. Further, the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B may have the same number of prize balls, or the latter may have a larger number of prize balls than the former.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Even if a game ball enters the out port 37, the prize ball is not paid out. In addition, a large number of nails 38 are planted on the game board 24 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are also arranged.

Here, entering the ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the manner in which the game ball is ejected from the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which it is not discharged. However, in the following explanation, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of a game ball into the out port 37, the general winning port 31, the first variable winning device 32A, the second variable winning device 32B, the first operating port 33, The entry of the game ball into the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35 is also expressed as winning.

A variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion (center frame 36a) of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, the area where game balls fired into the game area PE can fall is It is sectioned. Specifically, in the gaming area PE, there is an upper area PE1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and an area that is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is higher than the variable display unit 36. A left side area PE2 which is a left side area, a right side area PE3 which is continuous below the upper area PE1 and is an area to the right of the variable display unit 36, and each of the left side area PE2 and the right side area PE3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PE4 that is continuous below the variable display unit 36 and is below the variable display unit 36.

The area through which the ball flows down (passes) among these areas PE1 to PE4 is determined by the amount of rotational operation of the shooting handle 60, that is, the shooting force of the game ball. Specifically, when the player performs a rotational operation of the firing handle 60 as a first firing operation with a rotational operation amount in a first range that is greater than or equal to a predetermined rotational amount and less than a reference rotational amount, The fired game ball is more likely to be launched to the left of the horizontal center position in the upper region PE1. In this case, the game ball flows down the game area PE in the order of upper area PE1 → left area PE2 → lower area PE4.

On the other hand, when the player performs a rotational operation of the firing handle 60 as a second firing operation with a rotational operation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotational amount, the fired game ball is moved in the upper area PE1. The ball is more likely to be launched to the right than from the lateral center position. In this case, the game ball will flow down in the order of upper area PE1 → right area PE3 → lower area PE4. In other words, by adjusting the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60, it is possible to determine whether the game is played on the left route where the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, or whether the game is played on the right route where the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. , the player can select.

The reference amount of rotation is the amount of rotation operation at which the rate at which the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 and the rate at which the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 are the same or approximately the same, and also refers to a predetermined amount of rotation. is the amount of rotation operation that allows the fired game ball to pass through the guide rail 54 and enter the game area PE. With the amount of rotational operation in the first range, the rate at which the game ball flows down the left side area PE2 becomes high, and at the amount of rotational operation in the second range, the rate at which the game ball flows down the right side area PE3 increases.

The first operating port 33 is installed in the lower region PE4. The first operating port 33 is open upward and is not provided with a member for opening and closing. In a situation where the game balls are fired in the same manner, the winning probability at the first operating port 33 is constant regardless of the game state. In addition, the first operating port 33 is arranged directly below the stage 36b formed in the variable display unit 36, and the game balls that flowed onto the stage 36b through the guide path formed in the variable display unit 36. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 36b to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily enter the first operating port 33. The first operating port 33 is provided with a first operating port winning sensor 33a, and the game ball that has won in the first operating port 33 is detected by the first operating port winning sensor 33a.

Here, regarding the first operating port 33, game balls flowing down the left route can win (can reach), and game balls flowing down the right route cannot win (do not reach). That is, the arrangement of the game components and nails 38 in the left side area PE2, right side area PE3, and lower side area PE4 is configured to allow the game balls flowing down the left side area PE2 to reach the first operating port 33. On the other hand, it is configured not to allow the game balls flowing down the right side area PE3 to reach the first operating port 33. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize at the first operating port 33, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left route.

The second operating port 34 is installed in the right side area PE3. The configuration of the second operating port 34 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5. FIGS. 5(a) and 5(b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the second operating port 34. FIG.

The second operating port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a (variable receiving means) as a guide piece (support piece) consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 34a is connected to a drive unit 34b mounted on the back side of the game board 24, and is driven by the drive unit 34b to be in the closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) shown in FIG. 5(a). and the open state (support state or guide state) shown in FIG. 5(b). When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second operating port 34, and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second operating port 34. Incidentally, when it is in the open state, the electric accessory 34a protrudes toward the gaming area PE side and guides the winning to the second operating opening 34. The second operating port 34 is provided with a second operating port winning sensor 34c, and the game ball that has won in the second operating port 34 is detected by the second operating port winning sensor 34c.

In addition, the electric accessory 34a switches between a state in which it is easy for the game ball to enter the second operating port 34 and a state in which winning is more difficult than the above-mentioned state in which winning is more likely to occur, although winning is not impossible. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which switching between a state in which winning is more likely to occur and a state in which winning is more difficult to occur is performed by moving or rotating the electric accessory 34a in the front-back direction.

In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set in which the modes of support by the electric accessory 34a are different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34a is in the open state per unit time is determined when compared with the situation where the game ball continues to be launched in the same manner to the game area PE. The low-frequency support mode (or low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (or high-frequency guide state) are set such that the period of relatively high and low and/or open state is relatively long and short. It is set.

In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize at the second operating port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Then, when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of his balls.

As shown in FIG. 4, a through gate 35 is provided above (upstream side) of the second operating port 34 in the right region PE3. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) that passes through the through gate 35 in the vertical direction, and the game ball that enters the through gate 35 flows down the game area PE after winning the prize. Thereby, the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 can enter the second operating port 34. The through gate 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the game ball that has entered the through gate 35 is detected by the detection sensor 35a.

Based on winning in the through gate 35, the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is held triggered by winning in the through gate 35, and the result of the internal lottery is the opening result (support winning), and the through gate display section 44, which will be described later, displays a pattern corresponding to the result. When the fluctuating display of the symbol is finished in such a way that it is stopped and displayed (more specifically, after the symbol is displayed fixedly), the accessory opening/closing game (support execution mode) is executed. In the accessory opening/closing game, the electric accessory 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

For these second operation port 34 and through gate 35, if the firing handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side area PE2, it is impossible to win a prize, and the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. If the firing handle 60 is operated so as to flow downward, it is possible to win a prize. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize in the second operating port 34 and the through gate 35, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right route.

A first variable winning device 32A is arranged below the first operating port 33 in the lower region PE4. The configuration of the first variable prize winning device 32A will be explained with reference to FIG. 6.

The first variable winning device 32A includes a first big winning opening 321 that opens in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an opening/closing door 322 that opens and closes the first big winning opening 321. The first big prize opening 321 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The first grand prize opening 321 communicates with a guide passage 324 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is configured so that all game balls that have won in the first grand prize opening 321 are guided to the guiding passage 324. ing. The guide passage 324 is provided with a first big winning hole detection sensor 325 that detects passage of the game ball. A winning is detected.

Further, the first variable winning device 32A is provided with a drive section 323 that drives the opening/closing door 322. The opening/closing door 322 is driven by the drive unit 323 through a link mechanism (not shown), and is in the open state (FIG. 6(b)) in which a game ball can enter the first grand prize opening 321, and in the first grand prize opening. At 321, the game ball is switched to the closed state (FIG. 6(a)) in which winning is impossible.

It should be noted that it is not necessarily necessary that it becomes impossible to win a prize in the first big prize opening 321 when the first variable prize winning device 32A (opening/closing door 322) is in the closed state, but within the range where it is difficult to win compared to the open state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to win a prize. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of winning into the first big prize opening 321 is different between the open state and the closed state.

Here, for the first variable winning device 32A, the first variable winning device 32A is configured so that the game ball can win only when the firing handle 60 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side area PE3. The arrangement of the nails 38 and the game components around the device 32A is set. Therefore, when a player aims to win a prize in the first variable winning device 32A, the player plays the game by shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right route.

As shown in FIG. 4, the second variable winning device 32B is disposed diagonally below the right side of the variable display unit 36 (downstream side of the second operating port 34) in the right side area PE3. The configuration of the second variable prize winning device 32B will be explained with reference to FIG. 7.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the second variable winning device 32B includes a second big winning opening 351 that opens in front of the pachinko machine 10, and an opening/closing door 352 that opens and closes the second big winning opening 351. There is. The second variable winning device 32B is provided with a drive section 353 that drives the opening/closing door 352. The opening/closing door 352 is driven by a drive unit 353 through a link mechanism (not shown), so that it is in an open state in which a game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 351, and in an open state in which a gaming ball cannot enter the second grand prize opening 351. It is switched to the closed state.

It should be noted that it is not necessarily necessary that it becomes impossible to win a prize in the second big prize opening 351 when the second variable prize winning device 32B (opening/closing door 352) is in the closed state, but within the range where it is difficult to win compared to the open state. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to win a prize. In short, it is sufficient that the ease of winning into the second grand prize opening 351 is different between the open state and the closed state.

The second grand prize opening 351 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is large enough to allow a plurality of game balls to win at the same time. The second grand prize opening 351 communicates with a guide passage 354 provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is configured such that all game balls that have won in the second grand prize opening 351 are guided to the guiding passage 354. ing.

As shown in FIG. 7(b), the guide passage 354 branches into two from a midway position, with an upstream region 355 forming an upstream side of the branching position, and one forming an upstream area 355 downstream of the branching position. It includes a V winning area (or usable area) 356 and a discharge area (or unused area) 357 forming the other downstream of the branching position. Further, at the branch position, a distribution member 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing game balls that have arrived at the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the discharge area 357. When the distribution member 358 is not driven by the distribution drive unit 359, the game balls that have reached the branching position will flow into the discharge area 357, and the distribution member 358 will not be driven by the drive unit 359. In this state, the game ball that has reached the branch position flows into the V winning area 356.

A detection sensor 361 for counting is provided in the upstream area 355 of the guide path 354 so that a detection area exists at a position where the game balls flowing into the upstream area 355 always pass. Based on the detection of game balls by the counting detection sensor 361, payout of prize balls corresponding to winnings to the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Further, in the V winning area 356, a detection sensor 362 for V winning is provided so that a detection area exists at a position where the game balls flowing into the V winning area 356 always pass. A V jackpot occurs based on the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 362. The details of the V jackpot will be described later.

Further, a detection sensor 363 for discharge is provided in the discharge region 357 so that a detection region exists at a position where the game balls flowing into the discharge region 357 always pass. Based on the detection result by the detection sensor 363 for discharge and the detection result by the detection sensor 362 for V winning, it is determined whether or not there are game balls remaining in the second variable winning device 32B, and whether or not there are game balls remaining in the second variable winning device 32B. It is determined whether or not the number of prizes won matches the number of prizes discharged from the second variable prize winning device 32B.

The drive unit 359 is periodically driven and controlled from a predetermined timing. Specifically, from the start timing of the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened, the drive unit 359 for the distribution member is drive-controlled at a predetermined period. As a result, the timing at which game balls won into the second variable winning device 32B are distributed to the V winning area 356 side and the timing at which they are distributed to the ejection area 357 side are periodically switched.

A plurality of opening/closing execution modes in which the opening/closing door 352 remains open are set in the opening/closing execution mode in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened. Although the details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, by varying the periods during which the opening/closing door 352 is open, the probability that winning game balls will be distributed to the V winning area 356 will be relatively high or low. has been done. Hereinafter, the opening mode with a high probability of being allocated to the V winning area 356 will be referred to as a high-frequency winning mode (high expectation mode), and the opening mode with a low probability will be referred to as a low-frequency winning mode (low expectation mode). That's what it means.

In addition, the total probability that the game ball passes through the V winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode in which the game ball can enter the second variable winning device 32B. is set to be less than or equal to a predetermined probability (1/10). In other words, although the probability of passing through the V-winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode is increased, when combined with the probability of passing through the V-winning area 356 in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, , the winning rate to the second variable winning device 32B in the opening/closing execution mode of the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the passing rate of the V winning area 356, and the second variable winning device 32B so that the probability is below a predetermined probability. The allocation ratio of the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode when the opening/closing execution mode is implemented is set.

The second variable winning device 32B is preferably formed so that it can be visually confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 whether winning game balls are distributed to the V winning area 356 or the ejection area 357. Specifically, it is preferable that the front side of the second variable prize winning device 32B is formed to be colored and transparent or colorless and transparent.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 32A is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when an opening/closing execution mode (big winning gaming state) corresponding to a jackpot is executed. The jackpot gaming state is a mode to which the player enters when a jackpot is won. One round is when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the device 32A (first big prize opening 321), and the first variable prize winning device 32A is repeatedly opened with multiple rounds as the upper limit. There is.

On the other hand, the second variable winning device 32B is a variable winning device that is opened and closed when an opening/closing execution mode (special winning game state) corresponding to a special winning is executed. The special winning game state is a mode to which the player enters when a special winning is won. Alternatively, one round is defined as a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls winning in the second variable winning device 32B (second big winning opening 351), and that round game is executed only once. .

In addition, in the round game in the jackpot game state and the special win game state, the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable prize winning device 32A or the second variable prize winning device for a predetermined number of times and period is not satisfied even if the upper limit opening time and the upper limit winning number end conditions are not satisfied. The process is configured to end when the winning device 32B is released.

When a prize is won through the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, an internal lottery (a lottery to determine whether or not you have won a jackpot, a lottery to determine whether you have won a special win) is performed. If the player wins in the lottery, the game shifts to an opening/closing execution mode in which it is possible to win a prize in the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B.

As shown in FIG. 4, the operating port display section 43 and the through gate display section 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the lower outer edge of the gaming area PE. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces a window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the gaming area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and furthermore, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The operation opening display section 43 is provided to clearly indicate the number of round games in the opening/closing execution mode when the opening/closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening/closing execution mode is set) by winning a jackpot in the internal lottery. A round display section RS is provided. In the round display section RS, the display of the number of round games is started at the start of the opening/closing execution mode, and the display is ended at the end of the opening/closing execution mode.

In addition, the operating port display section 43 includes a first operating port display section AS for clearly indicating the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings at the first operating port 33, and a first operating port display section AS for displaying the results of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings at the first operating port 33. A second operating port display section BS is provided to clearly display the results of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings.

In the first actuating port display section AS, a variable display of symbols is performed using a win to the first actuating port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the first actuating port 33. The symbol corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning result for the first operating port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the picture corresponding to the winning result ( After the predetermined winning symbol (predetermined winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the display section BS for the second operating port, a variable display of symbols is performed using a prize winning to the second operating port 34 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variable display, a symbol is displayed based on a winning to the second operating port 34. The symbol corresponding to the result of the internal lottery is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display). If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning result at the second operating port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode, the picture corresponding to the winning result ( After the predetermined winning symbol (predetermined winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the mode shifts to the opening/closing execution mode.

In the following, in order to distinguish between the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner when a prize is won to the first operating port 33 and the symbols that are dynamically displayed in response to a prize that is entered to the second operating port 34, the former will be referred to as the first special symbol. Alternatively, it is called the first special pattern, and the latter is sometimes called the second special pattern or the second special pattern.

Here, based on a winning to either of the actuating ports 33, 34, a variable display of symbols is started on the corresponding first actuating port display section AS and second actuating port display section BS, and based on the winning. The period from when the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the game is stopped and displayed (determined display) to when the stoppage display ends corresponds to one game round. A supplementary explanation of the game round will be given with reference to FIG. 4(b).

In the game round on the operating opening display section 43, the variable display of the symbols is started based on the result of the winning lottery, and then the variable display of the symbols is fixedly displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning lottery. It is limited to one time. In other words, a game round consists of a variable display of symbols and a final display of the symbols that have been varied and displayed. Note that the term "determined" is based on the fact that the above-mentioned stop display is performed to display a definite stop result with the display content (picture) unchanged.

Here, the fixed display of the symbols is not completed by the end of the variable display, but is completed by the continuous display of the symbols in the form corresponding to the result of the win/fail lottery for a predetermined fixed display time. This is to ensure that the player has time to recognize the game results and to clarify the boundaries between the subsequent game rounds. Therefore, after the start of the variable display of symbols, the next game round (variable display) is started after the variable display time has elapsed and after the fixed display time has elapsed. In the following, the total period of the variable display time and fixed display time, that is, the period from the start of the variable display of symbols in the current game round until the start of the variable display of symbols in the next game round, is the game round. It is sometimes called the execution period.

The through gate display section 44 is a display section for clearly indicating the result of an internal lottery conducted based on winnings in the through gate 35. In this case, in the through gate display section 44, a winning in the through gate 35 is a trigger, and a variable display of symbols is performed, and the symbol corresponding to the lottery result based on the winning is stopped (determined display). The result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winnings in the through gate 35 is clearly displayed.

In addition, in the game round related to the through gate display section 44, as well as the game time related to the operating gate display section 43 shown in FIG. is started, and thereafter, the symbols that have been variably displayed are displayed in a fixed manner in a manner that corresponds to the result of the lottery.

If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning through gate 35 is a winning result that corresponds to the transition to the support state that opens the electric accessory 34a, the through gate display section 44 corresponds to the winning result. After the pattern (predetermined winning pattern) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), the game shifts to the accessory opening/closing game. In the accessory opening/closing game, opening/closing control (switching control) in which the electric accessory 34a is changed from the closed state to the open state and then changed to the closed state is executed at least once. The accessory opening/closing game is executed when the total opening time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds) or when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 4 balls) enter the second operating port 34 after transitioning to the game. is configured to end in In addition, the accessory opening/closing game is designed to end if the electric accessory 34a is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined period even if the end conditions of the upper limit opening time and the upper limit number of prizes are not met. It is configured.

The actuation port display section 43 and the through gate display section 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments, but are not limited to this, and may be configured using other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device. Good too.

Next, the variable display unit 36 will be explained. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that variably displays (or variably displays or switches) a symbol, which is a type of symbol.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device to be described later. Note that the symbol display device 41 is not limited to being a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

On the symbol display device 41, symbols are displayed side by side, for example, at the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are scrolled in the left and right direction and displayed in a variable manner. In this case, the variable display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. That is, when a variable display is performed on the operating port display section 43, a variable display is also performed on the symbol display device 41 accordingly. For example, when transitioning to a jackpot game state in which the first big prize opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is opened, the symbol display device 41 displays a predetermined combination of symbols on a preset active line. is stopped and displayed.

Further, on the symbol display device 41, a hold display corresponding to the first operating port display section AS and the second operating port display section BS is displayed. The number of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 is held up to a maximum of four, and the number of game balls entered into the second operating port 34 is held up to a maximum of four. In the above-mentioned hold display, a predetermined hold image is displayed, and the displayed number indicates the hold number of each operating port 33, 34. Note that the number of reservations is not limited to that shown by the above-mentioned reservation image, and may be indicated by a numerical display. Further, the structure is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be indicated by, for example, a display section, a light emitting section (reservation lamp section), etc. provided on the game board 24.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification/performance control device 82 are mounted on the back side of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 is equipped with a main control board that has a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power outage monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a board box 83 consisting of, etc. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. These box base and box cover are connected inseparably by a box connecting portion 85 serving as a separation preventing means (or connecting means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. Since these boxes are connected inseparably by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 is required to be destroyed or a portion thereof to be removed in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 83. A plurality of box coupling parts 85 are provided on the long sides of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as it connects the box base and the box cover in a non-releasable manner. The box cover is irreleasably coupled to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and even if unauthorized opening occurs, such a situation can be detected early and easily. Even after being released, it is possible to perform the release process again. That is, the joining process is performed by inserting a locking pawl into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box joining parts 85. When the board box 83 is opened in the event of a malfunction of the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the box joint part 85 into which the locking claw is inserted is connected to the other box joint part 85. Cut the connecting part and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base and box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. Thereafter, when performing the joining process again, a locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box joining part 85. If a history indicating that the board box 83 has been opened is left in the board box 83, it can be easily discovered by looking at the board box 83 that the board box 83 has been opened illegally.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the board box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of pieces to be coupled 87 formed on the mounting base of the main controller 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the pieces to be coupled 87 connect the board box 83 and the mounting base. A join process is performed between the two.

Note that as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the board box 83, a seal may be pasted across the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal is removed from the place where it is pasted, the adhesive layer of the seal remains on the board box 83 side, leaving traces of it. Furthermore, the seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave containing identification information in response to a calling wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the above response is received. A configuration may also be adopted in which it is impossible to transmit waves.

The notification/performance control device 82 is equipped with a notification/performance control board that controls audio, lamp displays, and a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 81, and the notification/performance control board is made of transparent resin. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 84 made of material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, to which a dispensing mechanism section 92, a discharge passage board 88, and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached. The back pack 91 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, notification/performance control device 82, etc. from the rear. have.

The payout mechanism section 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 94, and includes a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a tank 95 that is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game ball stored in the tank 95. A dispensing device 96 for dispensing balls. The game balls put out by the payout device 96 are discharged onto the upper tray 71 or the lower tray 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the dispensing mechanism section 92 is supplied with a main power source of, for example, 24 volts AC, and is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning the power on and off.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal 99 on the upper edge side, which is on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15. The external output terminal 99 includes an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95, etc., an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. An output terminal for outputting a signal each time the game machine is lent out, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and when changing states such as opening/closing execution mode. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal (or while transitioning to a state). Then, through these output terminals, signals regarding the state of the frame side are outputted to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

A discharge passage that is open to the rear is formed on the surface of the discharge passage board 88 facing the control device assembly unit 93, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 93. Game balls that have won in the various winning ports 31, 33, 34, 321, 351 and game balls that have entered the out port 37 are led out to the discharge passage on the back side of the game board 24. The discharge passage is formed to discharge the game balls to the island equipment of the game hall, and the game balls guided to the discharge passage are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by passing through the discharge passage.

The control device assembly unit 93 has a horizontally elongated mounting base, and a dispensing control device 97 and a power supply/firing control device 98 are mounted on this mounting base. The payout control device 97 and the power supply/launch control device 98 are arranged one on top of the other so that the payout control device 97 is located at the rear of the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a board box. In this case, fraud prevention means similar to the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power source/launch control device 98 includes a power source/launch control board housed in a board box, and the board generates and outputs a predetermined amount of power required by various control devices, etc. The launch of the game ball is controlled by operating the launch handle 60. In addition, this pachinko machine 10 has a memory retention function for various data, so that even in the event of a power outage, it can maintain the state at the time of the power outage and return to the state at the time of the power outage when recovering from the power outage. It looks like this.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram of FIG. 8.

The main control board 111 is equipped with an MPU 112 . The MPU 112 includes a ROM 113 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 112, and a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 113. A certain RAM 114, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, etc. are built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 113 and RAM 114 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 112, and each may be integrated into individual chips. This also applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

The MPU 112 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power outage monitoring board 115 provided in the main control device 81 and a payout control device 97 are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. In this case, a power supply/launch control device 98 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power outage monitoring board 115, and power is supplied to the MPU 112 via the power outage monitoring board 115.

Furthermore, various sensors are connected to the input side of the MPU 112. The various sensors include a general winning opening for detecting winnings to the general winning opening 31, the first operating opening 33, the second operating opening 34, the through gate 35, the first variable winning device 32A, and the second variable winning device 32B. Sensor 31a, first working opening winning sensor 33a, second working opening winning sensor 34c, through winning sensor 35a, first big winning opening detection sensor 325, detection sensor 361, V winning area 356, discharge Detection sensors 362, 363, etc. that detect the inflow of game balls into the area 357 are provided. The MPU 112 performs award determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion based on the detection results of these various sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 to 363. Furthermore, the MPU 112 executes various lottery drawings based on winnings in the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35.

A power outage monitoring board 115, a payout control device 97, a notification/presentation control device 82, etc. are connected to the output side of the MPU 112. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 97, for example, based on a winning determination result for the prize ball entering portion corresponding to the paying out of the prize ball.

Various commands for performance are output to the notification/performance control device 82. Details of these various commands will be explained later. Incidentally, the notification/performance control device 82 is electrically connected to the main control device 81 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of a signal line.

Further, the output side of the MPU 112 is connected to various drive units such as an electric accessory drive unit 34b and variable winning device drive units 323, 353, and 359. The main control board 111 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 112 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits. Specifically, when the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (jackpot gaming state or special winning gaming state) occurs, the opening/closing door 322 of the first variable winning device 32A, the opening/closing door 352 of the second variable winning device 32B, and the distribution member The drive control of the drive units 323, 353, and 359 is executed in the MPU 112 so that the drive units 358 are driven. Further, when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is won, the MPU 112 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened and closed. In addition, during a game round related to each operating port 33, 34, the MPU 112 executes display control of the first operating port display section AS or the second operating port display section BS in the operating port display section 43, and In the case of a jackpot game, display control of the round display section RS in the operation opening display section 43 is executed. Then, when displaying the lottery result as to whether or not the electric accessory 34a should be opened, the MPU 112 executes display control of the through gate display section 44.

Furthermore, an external output terminal 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 112, and through this external output terminal 99, ball entry information on various ball entry sections, jackpots, etc. are sent to the management control device (hall computer) on the gaming hall side. Information regarding the lottery results is output. This makes it possible to grasp the status of the pachinko machine 10 using the hall computer.

The power outage monitoring board 115 relays between the main control board 111 and the power source/launch control device 98, and also monitors the stable 24 volt DC voltage output from the power source/launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power source/launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, necessary operating power is generated for the main control board 111, the payout control device 97, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply/launch control device 98 is provided with a power supply unit for power outages such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power outages supplies power from the main power supply unit. Power for memory retention is supplied to the RAM 114 of the control device 81.

Further, the power supply/launch control device 98 is responsible for controlling the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. In this case, the game ball launch mechanism 53 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 54 of the game board 24, a ball feeding device that supplies game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail, and a ball feeder that supplies the game balls stored in the upper tray 71 onto the launch rail. A solenoid is an electric actuator that fires the game ball supplied to the guide rail 54 toward the guide rail 54, and a drive signal is supplied from the power supply/launch control device 98 to the solenoid to cause the game ball to fire. fired.

The notification/effect control device 82 drives and controls the display light emitting section 63 and the speaker section 64 provided in the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 81, and also controls the display control device 212. It is something.

An MPU 242 is mounted on the notification/performance control board 241 provided in the notification/performance control device 82. The MPU 242 includes a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 242, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 243. It has a built-in RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, etc.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242 . From the main controller 81, hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands are received. It also receives game time control commands (game time control information) such as a fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command. It also receives opening/closing execution mode commands (opening/closing execution mode information) such as open commands, closing commands, opening commands, and ending commands.

The MPU 242 performs processing for executing various effects based on various commands received from the main control device 81. The received command is stored in a command storage area provided in the RAM 244 of the MPU 242. Then, processing such as analysis of the stored commands is performed, and various effects are executed. The ROM 243 of the MPU 242 is provided with various table storage areas, and the RAM 244 of the MPU 242 is provided with various flag storage areas and various counter areas, and when performing various effects, processing using these areas is performed. It is now possible to do this.

The output side of the MPU 242 is connected to a display light emitting section 63 and a speaker section 64 provided in the front door frame 14, as well as a display control device 212.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board 271 on which an MPU 272 in which a program ROM 273 and a work RAM 274 are integrated into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 276, and a video RAM 277 are respectively mounted. There is.

The MPU 272 receives from the notification/performance control device 82 a hold display control command (hold display control information) to perform hold display control, a game time control command (game time control information) to perform fluctuating display of symbols, ), commands for opening/closing execution mode (information for opening/closing execution mode), etc. for displaying a video during opening/closing execution mode are received. Then, it analyzes the received commands or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 275 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 275).

The program ROM 273 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 272, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 274 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 272 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 274.

The VDP 275 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 275 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and in reality, it can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 275 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 272, the video RAM 277, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 277 from the character ROM 276 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 276 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 276 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table, etc. that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 276 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 276. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 273 is stored in the character ROM 276.

The video RAM 277 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 277, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be explained based on FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing individual symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

As shown in Figures 9(a) to (j), the pattern, which is a type of pattern, consists of nine types of main patterns, each numbered ``1'' to ``9,'' and a shell-shaped pattern. It is composed of sub-designs. More specifically, nine types of character symbols such as octopuses are numbered from "1" to "9" to form the main symbol.

As shown in FIG. 10(a), three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are set on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41: an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is composed of main symbols and sub-symbols arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, in the upper pattern row Z1, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in descending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols from "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and between the main symbol "9" and the main symbol "1". A main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged on the top, and one sub-symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and it is composed of 20 symbols. Then, on the display screen G, the symbols of each of these symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a cyclically scrolling manner in a predetermined direction. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10(b), on the display screen G, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols (3×3) are stopped and displayed. It is now possible to do so.

Five effective lines are set on the display screen G, namely, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a lower right line L4, and an upper right line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol row Z1 → lower symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2, and with a combination of symbols with the same number attached to any active line formed, all symbol rows Z1 ~ When the variable display of Z3 ends, a jackpot video is displayed as the occurrence of a jackpot result.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the variable display of each symbol row with reference to FIG. 11. When a game round is started, first, high-speed fluctuating display is started for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol row is being displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11(a), the fluctuating display mode of the upper symbol row Z1 is switched from a high-speed fluctuating display to a slow fluctuating display in which the player can recognize the fluctuating symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(b), when the fluctuating display of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, the fluctuating display mode of the lower symbol row Z3 switches from the high-speed fluctuating display to the low-speed fluctuating display. Then, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the variable display of the lower symbol row Z3 ends. After the variation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed, a stop display period is provided in which the stop display is maintained and stands by for a predetermined period.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbols are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 41, the symbols in the final stop row (the middle symbol row Z2 in this embodiment) are not suddenly stopped, but are gradually displayed while decreasing the fluctuating display speed. Generally, it is stopped at In this case, if it is configured so that the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) start to stop at the same time as the confirmation display starts on the actuation opening display section 43, the symbols will be The time in the stopped state is shortened, resulting in a substantial shortening of the stop display time.

Therefore, before starting the final display on the operating port display section 43, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped), and then the final stop display on the operating port display section 43 is started. It is configured to cause the temporarily stopped symbol to be permanently stopped (determined display) in accordance with the start timing of . The display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the temporary stop is different from that during the final display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 moves slowly back and forth, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (see FIG. 9) forming the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. In other words, the temporary stop is performed in such a way that although the symbol appears to be stopped at first glance, it remains in an incomplete stopped state (stopped display). On the other hand, the confirmed display is performed so that the character is completely stopped without any slight reciprocating movements or movements of the character.

In addition, the temporary stop display of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts with the stop result corresponding to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot, and then shifts to the final display as it is, as well as the temporary stop display that does not correspond to the result of the win/fail lottery or the type of jackpot. After the result is once stopped and displayed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again, and then changed to a stop result that corresponds to the result of the winning lottery, etc., and then the display may shift to a final display.

By the way, in the game round executed on the actuation port display section 43, the symbols are not temporarily stopped and displayed, but the symbols that have been fluctuated are suddenly stopped as the fluctuating display time elapses. (displayed state) is maintained until the fixed display time has elapsed. In other words, the stop display of the picture on the operating port display section 43 becomes a final display as it is. This also applies to the game rounds executed on the through gate display section 44.

Note that the manner in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned one and may be arbitrary, and may include the number of symbol rows, the direction of the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows, the number of symbols in each symbol row, The combination of symbols corresponding to jackpots and misses can be changed as appropriate.

A first hold display area Ga is set on the left side of the bottom of the display screen G, and a second hold display area Gb is set on the right side of the bottom of the display screen G.

The first hold display area (non-priority side hold display area) Ga includes unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when game balls enter the first operating port 33 in parallel in the left and right direction. The area is displayed as shown in the section. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the first unit holding display area Ga includes a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, a first unit holding display area Ga1, A 2-unit pending display area Ga2, a 3rd unit pending display area Ga3, and a 4th unit pending display area Ga4 are set.

For example, if the number of reserved game balls is one when the game ball enters the first operation port 33, a predetermined reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Ga1, and the game ball enters the first operation port 33. If the number of reserved items is 4 when winning a prize in the mouth 33, a predetermined pending image is displayed in all of the first unit pending display area Ga1 to the fourth unit pending display area Ga4.

In addition, the second hold display area (priority side hold display area) Gb includes unit hold display areas Gb1 to Gb4 of the same number as the maximum hold number when game balls enter the second operating port 34, which are arranged in the left and right direction. The area is marked as follows: Specifically, when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the maximum number of balls to be held is four, and correspondingly, the second holding display area Gb has a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, a first unit holding display area Gb1, A 2 unit pending display area Gb2, a 3rd unit pending display area Gb3, and a 4th unit pending display area Gb4 are set.

For example, if the number of reservations is one when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, the reservation image is displayed only in the first unit reservation display area Gb1, and the game ball enters the second operating port 34. If the number of reserved items is 4 when a prize is won, the reserved image is displayed in all of the first unit reserved display area Gb1 to the fourth unit reserved display area Gb4.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in MPU 112 of main controller 81>
Next, the electrical configuration for performing various lottery drawings in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 will be described using FIG. 12.

During the game, the MPU 112 uses various counter information to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting of the display on the actuating opening display section 43, setting of presentation contents on the symbol display device 41, setting of display on the through gate display section 44, etc. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, a winning random number counter C1 used for the occurrence lottery of jackpots and special winnings, a jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, and a special winning type. The special winning type counter C3 used for determination, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the fluctuation that determines the fluctuation display time on the operating opening display section 43 and the symbol display device 41. A type counter CS is used. Furthermore, an opening random number counter C4 is used to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the second actuating port 34 is to be placed in the open state.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 114a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 114. In the lottery counter buffer 114a, information corresponding to the random winning number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, special winning type counter C3, and variable type counter CS indicates that a winning has occurred at the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. In this case, the ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b as an information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 114b includes a holding area RE consisting of a holding area Ra for the first operating port and a holding area Rb for the second operating port, and an execution area AE. The reservation areas Ra and Rb each include a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, and the lottery counter Numerical information of the winning random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, special winning type counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS stored in the buffer 114a is stored as pending information in one of the areas. The pending information corresponds to special information (judgment information).

In this case, in the first to fourth areas, if winnings to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occur multiple times in a row, the first area → second area → third area → Each piece of numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. By providing each of the four areas in this manner, a maximum of four winning histories of game balls entered into the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 can be stored on hold. In addition, a reserved number storage area is provided in the reserved ball storage area 114b, and the number of reserved balls storing the winning history of the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 is specified in the reserved number storage area. Information for doing so is stored.

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the operating opening display section 43, and is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area RE. Based on various numerical information stored in the area AE, judgments of validity and the like are performed.

In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, the winning random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). When the winning random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is updated regularly and stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is stored in the second operating port of the RAM 114. storage area Rb.

The value of the random number that results in a jackpot is stored as a win/fail table (win/fail information group) in a win/fail table storage area 113a as a win/fail information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the validity table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 13. As the pass/fail table, a pass/fail table for the first operating port (FIG. 13(a)) and a pass/fail table for the second operating port (FIG. 13(b)) are provided. In the lottery based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the winning/failure table for the first operating port is referred to, and in the lottery based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, the winning/failure table for the second operating port is referred to. be done.

In the win/fail table for the first operating port, as shown in FIG. 13(a), there are three random number values corresponding to jackpot results: "7", "307", and "507". In other words, among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0" to "599," "7," "307," and "507" correspond to jackpot results, and the probability of a jackpot is 1/200. . In addition, in the win/fail table for the first operating port, one "207" corresponds to a special win result, and the probability of a special win result is 1/600. Note that the lottery result is configured to be a losing result except for the random number value that results in a jackpot result and the random number value that results in a special winning result.

In the win/fail table for the second operating port, as shown in FIG. 13(b), there are three random number values "7", "307", and "507" corresponding to the jackpot results. That is, "7" among the values of the winning random number counter C1 from "0 to 599" corresponds to a jackpot result, and the probability of a jackpot is 1/200. In the win/fail table for the second operating port, 200 pieces from "0" to "199" and "400" to "499" correspond to special winning results, and the probability of a special winning result is 1/3. ing. Note that the lottery result is configured to be a losing result except for the random number value that results in a jackpot result and the random number value that results in a special winning result.

The jackpot type counter C2 is for distributing the type when a jackpot occurs, and is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). It has become. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is stored in the second operating port of the RAM 114. storage area Rb.

The distribution destinations of game results for the jackpot type counter C2 are stored as a jackpot type table (first distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area serving as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 113. Here, the contents of the jackpot type table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 14.

As the jackpot type table, a jackpot type table for the first operating port (FIG. 14(a)) and a jackpot type table for the second operating port (FIG. 14(b)) are provided. When a jackpot is achieved based on a ball entering the first operating port 33, the jackpot type table for the first operating port is referred to, and when a jackpot is achieved based on a ball entering the second operating port 34, the jackpot type table for the first operating port is referred to. The jackpot type table for the second operating port is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 14(a), in the jackpot type table for the first operating port, "0" to "39" correspond to the 3R jackpot result A, and "40" to "99" correspond to the 3R jackpot result. It corresponds to B. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of being allocated to 3R jackpot result A is set to 40%, and the probability of being allocated to 3R jackpot result B is set to 60%. When the 3R jackpot result is A or the 3R jackpot result B, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which three rounds of round games are executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened three times.

As shown in FIG. 14(b), in the jackpot type table for the second operating port, "0" to "69" correspond to the 3R jackpot result B, and "70 to 99" correspond to the 9R jackpot result. are doing. That is, in this embodiment, the probability of being allocated to the 3R jackpot result B is set to 70%, and the probability of being allocated to the 9R jackpot result is set to 30%. When the 3R jackpot result is B, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which three rounds of round games are executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened three times. If the result is a 9R jackpot, the game shifts to a jackpot game state in which nine rounds of round games are executed, and the first variable winning device 32A is opened nine times.

In this embodiment, for each jackpot result, the support mode after the jackpot gaming state ends varies depending on the gaming state at the time of the jackpot result. Here, with reference to FIG. 15, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between each jackpot and the support mode after the jackpot gaming state ends.

First, 3R jackpot result A will be explained. If the 3R jackpot result is A under a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the jackpot game state ends will be the low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the 3R jackpot result is A in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the support mode set will be different depending on when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated, which will be described later. . When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the low-frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operation port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to with the 3R jackpot result A as a trigger becomes 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode When the number of games related to the port 34 reaches 100, or when the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, 3R jackpot result B will be explained. If the 3R jackpot result is B in a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the jackpot game state ends is the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 7, and the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 1 time. Seven times is set as the total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operation port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to with the 3R jackpot result B as a trigger becomes 7, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode When the number of games related to the port 34 becomes one, or when the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches seven times. , the support mode will switch from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the 3R jackpot result B is obtained under a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support modes set are different depending on when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the low-frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operation port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to with the 3R jackpot result B as a trigger becomes 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode When the number of games related to the port 34 reaches 100, or when the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the 9R jackpot result will be explained. If a 9R jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the jackpot game state ends will be the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 7, and the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 1 time. Seven times is set as the total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to due to the 9R jackpot result is 7, the second operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode If the number of games related to 34 becomes one, or if the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode becomes seven, The support mode will be switched from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if a 9R jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support modes set are different depending on when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the low-frequency support mode, whereas when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the jackpot game state becomes the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to due to the 9R jackpot result reaches 100, the second operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode If the number of games related to 34 reaches 100, or if the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, The high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

The special win type counter C3 is for distributing the type when a special win occurs, and is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). The structure is as follows. The special winning type counter C3 is updated regularly and is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is stored in the second operating port of the RAM 114. storage area Rb.

The distribution destinations of game results for the special winning type counter C3 are stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113 as a special winning type table (second distribution information group). Here, the contents of the special winning type table will be explained using the schematic diagram of FIG. 16.

As the special winning type table, there are provided a special winning type table for the first operating port (FIG. 16(a)) and a special winning type table for the second operating port (FIG. 16(b)). If a special win is achieved based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, the special winning type table for the first operating port is referred to, and a special win is achieved based on the ball entering the second operating port 34. In this case, the jackpot type table for the second operating port is referred to.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), in the special win type table for the first operating port, "0" to "99" correspond to the special win result A. In other words, if a special win is won based on the ball entering the first operating port 33, it is set so that the special win result A has a 100% probability. When the special winning result is A, a special winning game (one round opening/closing execution mode) is executed by the second variable winning device 32B. Specifically, the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in a low frequency winning mode in which the game balls that enter the second variable winning device 32B are unlikely to be distributed to the V winning area 356 (see FIG. 17(a)).

As shown in FIG. 16(b), in the special winning type table for the second operating port, "0" to "39" correspond to special winning result B, and "40" to "99" correspond to special winning result C. It corresponds to That is, when a special win is won based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, the special win result B will be assigned with a 40% probability, and the special win result C will be assigned with a 60% probability. When the special winning result B or the special winning result C is obtained, a special winning game (opening/closing execution mode of one round) is executed by the second variable prize winning device 32B. Specifically, the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in a high frequency winning mode in which game balls that enter the second variable winning device 32B are easily distributed to the V winning area 356 (see FIG. 17(a)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 18, supplementary explanation will be given regarding the low-frequency winning mode and the high-frequency winning mode. Incidentally, since the operation of the distribution member 358 (see FIG. 7) is the same in both the low-frequency winning mode and the high-frequency winning mode, the operation of the distribution member 358 will be explained first.

As shown in FIG. 18(a), at timing t1, which is the start timing of the game related to the special win, the distribution member 358 transfers the winning game balls of the second variable winning device 32B to the discharge area 357 (outside side). It is located in a position where it can be distributed to Then, at timing t4 when a waiting time of 1 sec has elapsed from timing t1, the distribution member 358 is displaced to a position where it distributes the winning game balls of the second variable winning device 32B to the V winning area 356. Thereafter, this state is maintained until a distribution time of 2 seconds has elapsed from timing t4, and at timing t5 when the distribution time has elapsed, it returns to the position on the out-of-line side.

In this case, in the special winning game with a low frequency winning mode that is executed based on the special winning result A, 0.5 seconds is set as the opening period of the special winning game (timing t2), and after the opening period has elapsed. , the second variable winning device 32B remains open for 0.1 sec (timing t3). That is, in the special winning game with the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B (0.1 sec) is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec), which is extremely short. Even if the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state, it is difficult for the game ball to win (it is almost impossible to expect winning). Even if a game ball wins, the process from opening to closing of the second variable winning device 32B is completed between timings t1 and t4 when the distribution member 358 is located on the ejection area 357 side, so the winning game The balls are sorted into a discharge area 357. In other words, the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning area 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state do not overlap, so that the game ball moves toward the V winning area 356. It has become impossible to pass.

On the other hand, in a special winning game with a high frequency winning mode that is executed based on special winning result B or special winning result C, as shown in FIG. 16(b), 0.5 sec is set as the opening period of the opening/closing execution mode. (timing t12), and after the opening period has elapsed, the second variable winning device 32B remains open for 1.8 seconds (timing t13). Therefore, in a special winning game with a high frequency winning mode, the distribution member 358 is displaced from the discharge area 357 side to the V winning area 356 side at timing t13 when the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. Become. As a result, the period in which the distribution member 358 is located on the V winning area 356 side and the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state overlap, and the period is 1.3 seconds. Since the firing cycle of game balls is 0.6 seconds, approximately two game balls can be won in the second variable prize winning device 32B during this period, so it is almost certain that one or more game balls will be awarded for V winning. It is possible to pass through the area 356.

In addition, in a special winning game with a high frequency winning mode, the period (0.5 sec ) is a period shorter than the product of the game ball firing cycle and the upper limit winning number (10 pieces) of the opening/closing execution mode. Therefore, after the second variable winning device 32B is opened and before the distribution member 358 is displaced to the V winning area 356 side, the number of winning game balls to the second variable winning device 32B reaches the upper limit. This prevents the special winning game from ending when the number reaches the number of prizes (the special winning game from ending without being distributed to the V winning area 356).

Here, no matter which of the special winning results A to C, the mode of opening/closing control of the second variable prize winning device 32B during the winning game is the same, but the distribution result of the special winning type is V jackpot. This will affect the distribution of jackpot types in the event that this occurs. That is, when the game ball that won the second variable winning device 32B in the special winning game flows into the V winning area 356 and a V winning occurs, depending on the type of the special winning game being executed at that time, The types of V jackpots are sorted. This distribution is performed using the jackpot type table (third distribution information group) for the V jackpot stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 113.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), in the jackpot type table for V jackpot, 3RV jackpot result, 5RV jackpot result, and 10RV jackpot result are set as jackpot result types. In the jackpot type table for the V jackpot, the type of the V winning flag and the type of the V jackpot result, which will be described later, are associated with each other. In other words, the type of the V jackpot result is determined by the type of the special win result that triggered the V jackpot. Specifically, if the special winning game being executed when the V winning occurs is triggered by the special winning result A, it will be assigned to the 3RV jackpot result and will be executed when the V winning occurs. If the special winning game that is being played is triggered by special winning result B, it will be distributed as a 5RV jackpot result, and the special winning game that is being executed when the V winning occurs is triggered by special winning result C. If so, it will be distributed as a 10RV jackpot result. If the result is a 3RV jackpot, the 3RV flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and if the result is a 5RV jackpot, the 5RV flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, and the result is a 10RV jackpot. If so, 10 RV flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114.

In this embodiment, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state differs depending on the game state at the time of the special winning result. Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the relationship between each V jackpot result and the support mode after the jackpot game state ends.

First, the 3RV jackpot results will be explained. If the support mode is triggered by a special winning result A in a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as the jackpot gaming state) becomes the low-frequency support mode. Become. On the other hand, if the support mode is triggered by special winning result A in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the support mode set will be different depending on when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated, which will be described later. . When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a low-frequency support mode, while when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode that was shifted to due to the 3RV jackpot result reaches 100, the second operating port 33 that was executed during the high-frequency support mode If the number of games related to 34 reaches 100, or if the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100, The high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the 5RV jackpot result will be explained. If the support mode is triggered by special winning result B in a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the V jackpot game state ends will be the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 7, and the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 1 time. Seven times is set as the total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode that was shifted to due to the 5RV jackpot result is 7, the second operating port 33 that was executed during the high-frequency support mode If the number of games related to 34 becomes one, or if the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode becomes seven, The support mode will be switched from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the support mode is triggered by the special winning result B in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support modes set are different when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a low-frequency support mode, while when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operation port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to with the special winning result B as a trigger becomes 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode When the number of games related to the port 34 reaches 100, or when the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Next, the 10RV jackpot result will be explained. If the support mode is triggered by a special winning result C in a situation where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the support mode after the V jackpot game state ends will be the high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 7, and the standard number of times to end the game session (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 1 time. Seven times is set as the total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operating port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode that was shifted to due to the 10RV jackpot result is 7, the second operating port 33 that was executed during the high-frequency support mode If the number of games related to 34 becomes one, or if the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode becomes seven, The support mode will be switched from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode. On the other hand, if the support mode is triggered by a special winning result C in a situation where the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the support modes set are different when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated. When the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a low-frequency support mode, while when the limiter is activated, the support mode after the end of the V jackpot game state becomes a high-frequency support mode. Regarding this high-frequency support mode, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the first operating port 33 is 100 times, the standard number of times to end the game times (time saving number) related to the second operating port 34 is 100 times, The total number of gaming times related to the first operating port 33 and gaming times related to the second operating port 34 is set to 100 times. In other words, if the number of games related to the first operation port 33 executed during the high-frequency support mode shifted to with the special winning result C as a trigger becomes 100, the second operation executed during the high-frequency support mode When the number of games related to the port 34 reaches 100, or when the total number of games related to the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 executed during the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the high-frequency support mode will be switched to the low-frequency support mode.

The MPU 112 uses the values of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the special winning type counter C3 stored in the execution area AE to display the first operating port display section AS and the second operating port display section. The suspension result at the BS is determined, and the suspension result table storage area of the ROM 113 is used for this determination.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS includes the variable display time and fixed display time in the first operating port display section AS and the second operating port display section BS of the operating port display section 43, and the variable display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. The MPU 112 uses this to determine. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. The variable type counter CS is stored in the reserved ball storage area 114b of the RAM 114 at the timing when the game ball enters the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. More specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 33, it is stored in the first operating port holding area Ra of the RAM 114, and when a game ball enters the second operating port 34, it is stored in the second operating port of the RAM 114. storage area Rb.

The MPU 112 uses the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE to determine the variation display time in the first operating port display section AS and the second operating port display section BS. In this case, the variable display time table storage area 113c of the ROM 113 is used.

The open random number counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 199, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 199). The open random number counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the power reserve area 114c of the RAM 114 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. The value of the random number that becomes a win (opening result) in this lottery is stored in the win/fail table storage area 113a of the ROM 113 as a through gate win/fail table. As the through gate propriety table, a table for low frequency support mode and a table for high frequency support mode are provided. When the support mode is low-frequency support mode, the through-gate validity table for low-frequency support mode is referred to, and when the support mode is high-frequency support mode, the through-gate validity table for high-frequency support mode is referred to. Referenced.

In the through gate win/fail table for low frequency support mode, the random number value corresponding to the opening result is one "7", and other than the random number value that is the opening result, the lottery result is a negative result (electric accessory). 34a is not opened). That is, the probability of an open result is 1/200, and in the low-frequency support mode, the setting is such that most of the results will be a losing result. Then, when the result of the normal drawing lottery under the low-frequency support mode is an open result, the accessory opening/closing game of the electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening/closing manner for the low-frequency support mode.

In the accessory opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a is performed once from the start to the end of the accessory opening/closing game. The open time in this case is set to 0.2 seconds. This opening time is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 seconds) and is considered to be extremely short, so even if the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, it is difficult to win a prize (it is almost impossible to expect to win a prize). It becomes. Therefore, under the low-frequency support mode, even if the lottery result is an open result, winnings to the second operating port 34 almost never occur, and the winnings are substantially based on winnings to the second operating port 34. It is not possible to participate in the lottery.

Note that the mode of the accessory opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and as long as winnings to the second operating port 34 almost never occur, opening/closing control of the electric accessory 34a may be performed in multiple ways. The opening may be repeated twice, or the opening time may be set to a time other than 0.2 seconds.

In the through-gate success/failure table for high-frequency support mode, there are 190 random number values from "0" to "189" that correspond to open results. (The result is that the electric accessory 34a does not open). That is, the probability of an open result is 190/200, and in the high-frequency support mode, the setting is such that most of the chances will be an open result. Then, when the result of the lottery under the high-frequency support mode is an open result, the accessory opening/closing game of the electric accessory 34a is executed in the opening/closing manner for the high-frequency support mode.

In the accessory opening/closing game for the high-frequency support mode, the opening time is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec) than in the accessory opening/closing game for the low-frequency support mode. Specifically, in order to make it easier to accumulate the reservation related to the second operating port 34 and to receive the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the second operating port 34, the opening time is set to the game ball firing cycle (0.6 sec). differentiated enough to be longer than .

<About various processes executed by the main controller 81>
Next, the timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 112 in the main control device 81 in order to advance the game will be explained. In addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, the MPU 112 executes main processing that is started upon power-on and NMI interrupt processing that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 19. This process is started by the MPU 112 periodically (for example, every 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. In the reading process, the states of various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are read, and the states of these various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 35a, 325, 361 to 363 are determined and detected. Perform processing to save information. In addition, when the winning of a game ball is detected by the various detection sensors 31a, 33a, 34c, 325, 361 corresponding to the occurrence of prize balls, the system instructs the payout control device 97 to pay out the prize balls. Set the prize ball command. For example, when a winning to the first variable winning device 32A is detected by the first big winning opening detection sensor 325, a prize ball command is issued to instruct 15 prize balls, which is the corresponding number of prize balls. Set. In the following step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated.

In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special winning type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special winning type counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the subsequent step S104, a through prize winning process is executed in conjunction with winning the through gate 35. In the winning processing for through, if a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of accessory retention memories stored in the electric role retention area 114c is less than the upper limit number (for example, "4") Under this condition, the value of the open random number counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the power reserve area 114c. Further, the notification/performance control device 82 executes a process for lighting up the third holding light emitting section 47 corresponding to the number of stored accessory objects.

In the following step S105, winning processing for the operating opening is executed. Here, the winning process for the operating port will be explained based on the flowchart of FIG. 20.

In the winning process for the operating port, first in step S201, it is determined whether the game ball has won the first operating port 33 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the first operating port winning sensor 33a. When it is determined that a game ball has entered the first operating port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command is set for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls. In the subsequent step S203, it is determined whether the first starting pending storage number RaN stored in the pending ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (whether it is 0 or not). The first start pending storage number RaN is incremented by 1 when the pending information is stored in the first actuation port holding area Ra based on the winning to the first actuation port 33, and the game time of the first special symbol is When started, 1 is subtracted.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, a process of adding 1 to the first start pending storage number RaN is executed in step S204. Thereafter, in step S205, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special winning type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS in the first operation opening holding area Ra. In the following step S206, a preliminary confirmation process for the first operating port is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this advance confirmation process, a preliminary confirmation such as a jackpot is performed for the hold obtained this time.

Thereafter, in step S207, a first pending command setting process is executed. In this process, information that a prize has been won to the first operating port 33 is outputted to the notification/performance control device 82 side, and information regarding pending information acquired based on the current winning to the first operating port 33 is output. A process is performed to output information on the game times (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the notification/performance control device 82 side.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a situation where the upper limit number (4 pieces) of pending information is stored in the first operating port holding area Ra, even if a winning occurs in the first operating port 33, the pending information is not stored. is not acquired, and therefore, even if a prize is won to the first operating port 33 in this situation, the first pending command is not output. This also applies to the second pending command, which will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in either step S201 or step S203, or after executing the process in step S207, the process advances to step S208. In step S208, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 34 (starting winning) based on the detection state of the second operating port winning sensor 34c. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out one game ball is set in step S209. In the following step S210, it is determined whether the second start pending storage number RbN stored in the pending ball storage area 114b is less than the maximum number (1) that can be stored (whether it is 0 or not). The second start pending storage number RbN is incremented by 1 when the pending information is stored in the second operating port holding area Rb based on the winning to the second operating port 34, and the game time of the second special symbol is When started, 1 is subtracted.

If it is less than the maximum number, that is, 0, in step S211, a process of adding 1 to the second start pending storage number RbN is executed. Thereafter, in step S212, information acquisition processing is performed to store each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the special winning type counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS in the second operation opening holding area Rb. In the subsequent step S213, a preliminary confirmation process for the second operating port is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this advance confirmation process, a preliminary confirmation such as a jackpot is performed for the hold obtained this time.

In the following step S214, a second pending command setting process is executed. In this process, information that a prize has been won to the second actuation port 34 is output to the notification/performance control device 82 side, and information regarding pending information acquired based on the current win to the second actuation port 34 is output. A process is performed to output information on the game times (game result information, variable display time information, etc.) to the notification/performance control device 82 side. If a negative determination is made in either step S208 or step S210, or after executing the process in step S214, the winning process for the main operating port is ended.

The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S209 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process of the normal process described later. Further, the hold command set in steps S207 and S214 is also transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process. These pending commands include information as to which of the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 the winning is based on, and the notification/performance control device 82 By receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 controls the variable display of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 side and the display setting of the reduced symbol display area provided at the corner of the display screen G. Let it happen.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process in FIG. 19, after executing the winning process for the operating opening in step S105, in step S106, the V winning process is executed to detect the occurrence of a V winning, and then, This timer interrupt processing ends. The V winning process will be detailed later.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started upon power-on is executed, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an overview, the processing in steps S301 to S308 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps S311 and S312 is executed in the remaining time.

In normal processing, first, in step S301, external signal output processing is executed. In the external signal output process of step S301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. Further, if a production command is set, it is transmitted to the notification/production control device 82.

Next, in step S302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 114.

In the subsequent step S303, a game round control process for advancing the game round related to each operating port 33, 34 is executed. In this game round control process, judgment is made on whether or not the jackpot is correct, judgment is made on the distribution of the jackpot type, and distribution judgment of the special hit type. Configure variable display settings, etc.

After executing the game time control process in step S303, the process proceeds to step S304, and a process for shifting the gaming state to a special winning gaming state (special winning gaming state transition processing) is executed. In the following step S305, a process for shifting the gaming state to a jackpot gaming state (jackpot gaming state transition process) is executed.

Next, in step S306, an electric utility support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second operating port 34 is executed. In the subsequent step S307, a V distribution setting process for driving and controlling the distribution member 358 provided in the second variable winning device 32B is executed.

In addition, the game times control processing in step S303, the transition processing to the special winning gaming state in step S304, the transition processing to the jackpot gaming state in step S305, the electric role support processing in step S306, and the V distribution setting processing in step S307. The details will be described later.

After executing the V distribution setting process in step S307, a game ball launch control process is executed in step S308. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 53 is excited once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on the condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply/launch control device 98. . As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S309, it is determined whether a power outage flag is set in the RAM 114. The power outage flag is set when the occurrence of a power outage is confirmed on the power outage monitoring board 115 and a power outage signal is input from the power outage monitoring board 115 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 112, and is cleared in the next main process.

If the power outage flag is not set, it means that the last process of the multiple processes that are repeatedly executed has finished, so in step S310, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated.

That is, in step S311, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114. Furthermore, in step S312, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the change type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value, they are cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 114.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S301 to S308 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated, and similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated randomly.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S309 that the power outage flag is set, this means that a power outage has occurred, and the power outage processing from step S313 onwards is executed. That is, in step S313, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, then in step S314, the RAM judgment value is calculated and saved, and in step S315, access to the RAM 114 is prohibited, and then the power is completely cut off and processing is performed. Continues an infinite loop until it can no longer be executed.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process in step S303 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22.

In the game time control process, first in step S401, it is determined whether a jackpot game or a special win game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether various jackpot flags and various special win flags are stored (stored) in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, and is stored when the game state is transferred to the jackpot game state in the transition process to the jackpot game state, which will be described later. Cleared when exiting the state. In addition, the special winning flag is a flag indicating that a special winning game is being executed, and is stored when the gaming state is transferred to the special winning gaming state in the transition process to the special winning gaming state, which will be described later. It is deleted when the special winning game state is ended in the transition process.

When a jackpot game or a special winning game is being executed, the processing from step S402 onwards, that is, the process for starting the game round in steps S404 to S406, the process for advancing the game round in step S408, and the process for ending the game round in step S409. This special figure game time control process is ended without executing any of the processes. In other words, when a jackpot game or a special winning game is being executed, the game round related to the operating ports 33, 34 is started regardless of whether or not a winning has occurred in the operating ports 33, 34. There isn't.

If the jackpot game or the special win game is not being executed, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the operating port display section 43 is in the process of changing display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first operating port display section AS or the second operating port display section BS is displaying a variable display. Note that this determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The variable display flag is stored when a variable display is started for either the first operating port display section AS or the second operating port display section BS, and is cleared when the variable display ends.

If the operating port display section 43 is not in the variable display mode, the process advances to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether the confirmation display on the operating port display section 43 has been completed. That is, after the above-mentioned fluctuating display ends, the result display is executed for a predetermined period, but in this step, it is determined whether or not this fixed display has ended.

If the confirmation display has ended, the process advances to steps S404 to S406 for starting the game round. In the process for starting a game round, first, in step S404, it is determined whether the common reservation number CRN, which is the sum of the number of start reservations stored in the first operation port display section AS and the second operation port display section BS, is "0". Determine whether or not. When the common reservation number CRN is "0", it means that the start reservation storage numbers RaN and RbN are "0" for both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34. Therefore, the main game round control process is ended as it is.

If the common reservation number CRN is not "0", in step S405 data for setting the data stored in the first actuation port holding area Ra or the second actuation port holding area Rb for variable display is set. After executing the setting process and further executing a variation start process for starting the variable display on the operating opening display section 43 and the variable display on the symbol display device 41 in step S406, the present game round control process is ended.

Here, the data setting process in step S405 and the fluctuation start process in step S406 will be described in detail below. First, data setting processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first in step S501, it is determined whether the second start hold storage number RbN held in the hold area Rb for the second actuation port is "0". If the second start pending memory number RbN is "0", the data setting process regarding the first operating port display section AS in steps S502 to S506 is executed, and the second start pending memory number RbN is not "0". In this case, data setting processing regarding the second operating port display section BS in steps S507 to S512 is executed.

Here, the case where the data setting process is executed is the case where the common reservation number CRN is 1 or more, as already explained. In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start hold memory number RbN is "0". If the information is stored, the data stored in the second actuation port holding area Rb is set as a variable display regardless of whether the first start hold storage number RaN is 1 or more. That's what I do. As a result, if the holding information is stored in both the first working port holding area Ra and the second working port holding area Rb, the second working port holding area Rb corresponding to the second working port 34 Priority will be given to the pending information stored in .

In the data setting process regarding the first actuating port display section AS, first in step S502, the first start hold storage number RaN of the first actuating port holding area Ra is decremented by one. In the following step S503, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S504, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the first actuation opening holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S505, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first operation opening holding area Ra. This data shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the fourth area Ra4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1, and also clears the data in the second area Ra2→ Data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area Ra1, third area Ra3→second area Ra2, fourth area Ra4→third area Ra3, and so on.

In the subsequent step S506, a shift command (shift occurrence information). In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area of the ROM 113 that the holding area RE, which is the target of the current data shift, corresponds to the holding area Ra for the first actuating port, that is, the holding area RE for the first actuating port 33. A shift command for the first operating port that includes information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift command for the first operating port is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process ends.

The first operating port shift command set in step S506 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The notification/performance control device 82 executes a process for changing the display in the first holding display area Ga of the symbol display device 41 in response to a decrease in the number of holding pieces, based on the received shift command for the first operating port. Execute.

In the data setting process regarding the second actuation port display section BS, first in step S507, the second start hold storage number RbN of the second actuation port holding area Rb is decremented by one. In the following step S508, the common reservation number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, in step S509, the data stored in the first area Rb1 of the second actuation port holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE.

Thereafter, in step S510, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second operating port holding area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Rb1 to the fourth area Rb4 to the lower area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area Rb1, third area Rb3→second area Rb2, fourth area Rb4→third area Rb3, and so on.

In the subsequent step S511, the second operating port flag is set (stored) in the second operating port display flag storage area (second operating port display information storage means) provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. )do. The second operating port flag is information for specifying that the start of the current variable display is the variable display on the second operating port display section BS side, and in other words, the second special symbol game cycle. This is a flag indicating that is currently being executed. The stored flag for the second operating port is erased when the game round of the second special symbol ends.

In the subsequent step S512, a shift command for the second actuation opening (shift occurrence information ). In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area of the ROM 113 that the holding area RE, which is the target of the current data shift, corresponds to the holding area Rb for the second operating port, that is, it corresponds to the second operating port 34. A shift command for the second operating port that includes information about what is being done is selected, and the selected shift command for the second operating port is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82. After that, this data setting process ends.

The second operating port shift command set in step S512 is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The notification/performance control device 82 controls the display in the second hold light emitting section 46 of the variable display unit 36 and the display in the second hold display area Gb of the symbol display device 41 based on the received shift command for the second operating port. , executes processing to make changes in response to a decrease in the number of pending items.

Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24.

<Fluctuation start processing>
In the variation start process, first in step S601, it is determined whether or not the second operating port flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114.

If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, in step S602, a judgment is made with reference to the correctness table for the first operating port (see FIG. 13(a)), and the flag for the second operating port is determined. If it is stored, in step S603, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the second operating port (see FIG. 13(b)). After executing step S602 or step S603, it is determined in step S604 whether or not the result of each of the above-mentioned validity determinations is a jackpot result.

If it is a jackpot win, it is determined in step S605 whether or not the second operating port flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, in step S606, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the first operating port (see FIG. 14(a)). On the other hand, if the flag for the second operating port is stored, in step S607, the jackpot type is determined by referring to the jackpot type table for the second operating port (see FIG. 14(b)).

After step S606 or step S607 is executed, in step S608, a process for setting a stop result for the jackpot according to the distribution result is executed. This process sets a stop result for a jackpot for the symbol in the actuating opening display section 43, and if the jackpot type is assigned to 3R jackpot result A as a result of the distribution determination in step S606, it is a 3R jackpot. Set a stop result for result A, and if the jackpot type is assigned to 3R jackpot result B, set a stop result for 3R jackpot result B (a stop result different from the stop result for 3R jackpot result A). , If the jackpot type is assigned to the 9R jackpot result, a stop result for the 9R jackpot result (a stop result different from the stop results for the 3R jackpot results A and B) is set. In this way, the result of stopping the symbols on the operating opening display section 43 is set based on the distribution result of the jackpot type, and substantially corresponds to the value of the jackpot type counter C2. In this sense, the jackpot type counter C2 can be said to be a jackpot symbol counter for drawing the stop results of the symbols on the operating opening display section 43.

It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the stop result of the pattern on the actuating opening display section 43 is selected based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Even in this case, the result of stopping the symbols corresponds to the result of allocating the jackpot type. Furthermore, the pattern stopping results may be configured such that one type of stopping result corresponds to one jackpot type, or may be configured such that a plurality of types of stopping results correspond. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which shares the stop picture in the display part AS for 1st actuating ports, and the stop picture in display part BS for 2nd actuating ports.

After executing step S608, in step S609, various jackpot flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for specifying the current jackpot type. Specifically, one of the 3R flag A, 3R flag B, and 9R flag is set as corresponding to the 3R jackpot result A, 3R jackpot result B, and 9R jackpot result, respectively.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S604 (determined that a jackpot has not occurred), it is determined in step S610 whether or not the result of the validity determination in step S602 or step S603 is a special winning result. If it is a special winning result, it is determined in step S611 whether or not the second operating port flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. If the flag for the second operating port is not stored, in step S612, the special winning type is determined by referring to the special winning type table for the first operating port (see FIG. 16(a)). On the other hand, if the flag for the second operating port is stored, in step S613, the special winning type is allocated with reference to the special winning type table for the second operating port (see FIG. 16(b)). conduct.

After executing step S612 or step S613, in step S614, a process for setting a special winning stop result according to the distribution result is executed. This step is to set a stop result for a special win for the picture in the operating port display section 43, and if the special win type is assigned to special win result A as a result of the distribution determination in step S612, , set the stop result for the special winning result A. In addition, if the special winning type is assigned to special winning result B in step S613, a stop result for special winning result B is set, and if the special winning type is assigned to special winning result C, Set the stop result for special winning result C.

In addition, regarding the number of types of stop results for one special winning type and the fact that the stop symbols on the display section AS for the first operation port and the stop symbols on the display section BS for the second operation port may be used in common, there are no restrictions for jackpots. The same is true for the stop result of .

After executing step S614, in step S615, various special winning flags are set in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 as information for specifying the current special winning type. Specifically, one of the special win A flag, special win B flag, and special win C flag is set as corresponding to special win result A, special win result B, and special win result C, respectively.

If a negative determination is made in step S610 (determined that no special hit has occurred), then in step S616, a stop result corresponding to the missed result is set as the stop result on the operating port display section 43.

After executing step S609, step S615, or step S616, the process advances to step S617, and a variable display time setting process is executed. In the process of setting the variable display time, the variable display time table is set according to the result of the winning lottery, the number of reservations, and various conditions of the game state. The variable display time of symbols on the symbol and symbol display device 41 is set.

After executing the variable display time setting process in step S617, a variable start command and a type command are set as commands to be transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in step S618. The fluctuation start command includes information on the fluctuation display time (including whether there is a reach display). Further, the type command includes information on the jackpot type and the special win type (and/or the jackpot symbol and the special prize symbol on the operating opening display section 43).

Here, the reach display (ready-to-reach state) is equipped with a symbol display device 41 that can perform variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and is in an opening/closing execution mode (jackpot game state or special win game state). In the gaming machine where the stop display result after the variable display becomes the special display result (jackpot stop result or special win stop result) in the game round, the variable display (or variable display) of the symbols (pictures) on the symbol display device 41 is This is a display state that is used to make the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result after the start of the game and before the stop display result is derived and displayed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying the symbols for some of the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, a hit corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot game state or a special win game state can be achieved. This is a display state in which a combination of ready-to-reach symbols that has a possibility of forming a symbol combination is displayed, and in this state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a step before ending the fluctuating display of symbols, there is a possibility that a combination of winning symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening/closing execution mode will be established on a preset valid line on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a certain combination of reach symbols, and a fluctuating display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence under the situation where the reach line is formed.

More specifically, a reach line is formed by stopping and displaying main symbols with the same number on any of the active lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 10). Then, when the fluctuating display of the middle symbol row Z2 switches from a high-speed fluctuating display to a low-speed fluctuating display and a jackpot game state occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is displayed. is stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the fluctuating display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 is ended. In addition, even when a special winning game state occurs in a specific state, the main symbols with the same number as the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line, so that the middle symbol row The variable display of symbols in Z2 is ended.

In addition, in the reach display, while displaying the combination of the reach symbols as described above, the remaining symbol rows display fluctuating symbols, and the background screen displays a predetermined character etc. as a moving image. These include those that perform a reach effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of ready-to-reach symbols. Further, when the ready-to-reach display is being performed or before the ready-to-reach display, a random number counter for presentation may be used to determine whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character.

After that, in step S621, the variable display of the symbols is started on the display section corresponding to the current special pattern game round among the first operating port display section AS and the second operating port display section BS. In this case, if the flag for the second operating port is not stored in the RAM 114, the result display section corresponding to the current special figure game is specified as the first operating port display section AS, and the second operating port flag is stored in the RAM 114. If the mouth flag is stored, the result display section corresponding to the current special symbol game round is specified as the second operating mouth display section BS. After that, the main fluctuation start process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the special figure game times control process in FIG. 22, if a negative determination is made in step S402 (determined that the variable display is in progress) or a negative determination is made in step S403 (determined that the fixed display is not completed), Then, the process proceeds to step S407, and the game progress processing of steps S407 and S408 is executed. In the game progress processing, first in step S407, it is determined whether or not the variable display time of the current special figure game time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed, a variable display process is executed in step S408. In the variable display processing, display control is performed on the result display section for the current special figure game so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order (emission control of each display segment is performed). ), and ends this game round control process.

If the variable display time has elapsed, a final display process (game end process) is executed in step S409. The final display process is for definitively displaying the picture on the operating port display section 43 based on the stop result set in step S608, step S614, or step S616. Here, the final display process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25.

In the final display process, first in step S701, it is determined whether or not the operating port display section 43 is currently displaying a picture (stop result) as a final display. If it is determined that the final display is not in progress, processing for setting the final display time is executed in step S702. In this step, the final display time defined for each gaming state is set in the final display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the final display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 19) is activated.

In the following step S703, a process for starting the final display, that is, a process for stopping and displaying the pattern that is being variably displayed on the operating port display section 43 is executed. In this case, based on the stop result setting processing in step S608, step S614, or step S616 in FIG. do.

In the following step S704, a variation end command is set, and then the final confirmation display process is ended. The variation end command includes information on the fixed display time. The set variation end command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). By receiving the variation end command, the notification/performance control device 82 recognizes that the final display has started on the operating port display section 43 and the final display time.

Note that the setting process (transmission process) of the variation end command may be omitted. In this case, the fluctuation start command (step S618 in FIG. 24) is set to include information on the fixed display time.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S701 (determined that the final display is in progress), the process advances to step S705, and it is determined whether or not the final display time has elapsed. If the final display time has not elapsed, the final display process ends. On the other hand, if the fixed display time has elapsed, a process for ending the high-frequency support mode is executed in step S706. Thereafter, in step S707, the second operating port flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 is erased, and the final confirmation display process is ended.

Furthermore, if the next game round (fluctuating display) does not start on the display section where the symbol was stopped and displayed, the symbol (stop result) that is stopped and displayed on the display sections AS and BS for each actuation port will not be displayed at the fixed display time. Even after the elapsed time, the display continues to stop. Therefore, if there is no pending memory for the next special game game, a new pending memory will be generated, and until the next game starts, the result of the lottery of the previous game will be held. Stop results continue to be displayed. In addition, even in the case of a transition to a jackpot gaming state or a special winning gaming state, the stop result of the gaming round that triggered the transition to the relevant gaming state will be maintained until the end of these gaming states and the start of a new gaming round. continues to be displayed.

<Transition process to special winning game state>
Next, the transition process to the special winning game state in step S304 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 26.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that a jackpot game is being executed, is stored at the start of the jackpot game, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process advances to step S802, and it is determined whether or not a special winning game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. The special winning game flag is a flag indicating that a special winning game is being executed.

If it is determined that the special winning game is not being executed (the special winning game flag is not stored), the process advances to step S803, and the various special winning flags (step S615 in FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage area 114e. Determine whether it is stored. That is, it is determined whether or not it is a special winning state.

If it is determined that various special winning flags are stored, it is determined in step S804 whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is not the end timing of the game round, the transition process to the special winning game state is immediately ended. In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801 (determined that the jackpot game is being executed), and a negative determination is made in step S803 (determined that various special win flags are not stored), this special winning game state Finish the migration process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the game round, a special winning game start process is executed in step S805. In the start process, a special winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and it is checked that the second variable winning device 32B is in the closed state before starting the special winning game. In addition, in this start process, an opening period setting process is executed to wait without starting to open the second variable prize winning device 32B at the start of the special winning game. In the opening period setting process, a value corresponding to the opening period is set in the first timer counter area TC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value (counter value) set in the first timer counter area TC1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the subsequent step S806, a process is executed to set "1" in the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 to set the number of executions of the round game in the special winning game.

In the following step S807, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21). The notification/performance control device 82 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the performance are executed.

In the following step S808, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to the special winning game state is ended. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special winning signal provided in the external output terminal 99 is set to the special winning signal output state. As a result, if the output terminal for the special win signal is connected to the management control device on the gaming hall side, the special win signal is output to the management control device, and the special win signal is output to the management control device in the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to know that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S802 (determined that the special winning game is being executed), the process proceeds to step S809, and it is determined whether or not the opening waiting time has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the transition process to the special winning game state is immediately ended.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process advances to step S810, and special winning opening/closing processing for opening and closing the second big winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is executed. Here, the special winning opening/closing process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

<Special winning opening/closing process>
In the special winning opening/closing process, first in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second big winning opening 351 of the second variable winning device 32B is being opened. Specifically, this determination is made based on the driving state of the driving section 353 of the second variable prize winning device 32B. If the second big prize opening 351 is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0", and in step S903, the first timer counter area TC1 of the RAM 114 is determined. It is determined whether the value of is "0" or not.

If the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" or if the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", the main opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0", the process advances to step S904, and the special winning flag B is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. Or it is determined whether the special winning flag C is stored.

If any of the above special winning flags is stored, the process advances to step S905, and "900" (equivalent to 1.8 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area TC1 as the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B. set. On the other hand, if neither of the special winning flags B and C is stored, the process advances to step S906, and "50" (0.1 sec. ).

After executing step S905 or step S906, in step S907, a setting process of the upper limit number of winnings to the second variable winning device 32B in the special winning game is performed. Specifically, a value of "10" corresponding to the upper limit number of winnings is set in the first winning counter area PC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114.

In the subsequent step S908, the drive unit 353 for the opening/closing door 352 is driven to open the second variable winning device 32B. Then, in step S909, an opening command is set, and this special winning opening/closing process is ended. This set release command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

Further, if it is determined in step S901 that the second big prize opening 351 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S910, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is "0". . If the value of the first timer counter area TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S911 whether or not a winning has occurred in the second variable winning device 32B. If no prize has been won, this special winning opening/closing process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is subtracted by 1 in step S912. In the following step S913, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter area PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the special winning opening/closing process is directly ended.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S913 or step S910 above, it means that the closing condition for the second big prize opening 351 is satisfied. In such a case, in step S914, the drive unit 353 is brought into a non-drive state in order to close the second big prize opening 351.

In the following step S915, the value of the round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1, and in step S916, ending start processing is executed. In the start processing, an ending standby time is set for the ending of the special winning game to wait without starting the next game round. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending, which is stored in advance in the ROM 113, is set in the waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. The value of the waiting time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

After that, in step S917, after setting an ending command, the main prize opening opening/closing process is ended. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 21).

Returning to the explanation of the transition process to the special winning game state in FIG. 26, after executing the special winning opening/closing process in step S810, it is determined in step S811 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". judge. Furthermore, in step S812, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the special winning game state is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the special winning game ending process is executed in step S813, and then the main special winning game is started. Finish the state transition process. Here, the end processing of the special winning game in step S813 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

<Special winning game termination process>
In the end processing of the special winning game, first in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process of step S106 in the timer interrupt process in FIG. 19.

Here, the V winning process in step S106 will be explained. Further, as a process related to V winning, the V distribution setting process in step S307 in the normal process will be explained. First, the V distribution setting process in step S307 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<V distribution setting process>
In the V distribution setting process, first in step S1101, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special winning game. If it is the start timing, "500" corresponding to 1 sec is set in the second timer counter area TC2 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 in step S1102. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter area TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In the following step S1103, "1" is set in the distribution number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 114d. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution number counter area HC is used by the MPU 112 to specify the number of times the distribution member 358 operates.

If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or after executing the process in step S1103, the process advances to step S1104. In step S1104, it is determined whether or not the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 by grasping the driving state of the distribution member drive unit 359. When the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the discharge area 357, it is determined in step S1305 whether the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated, while if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is "0", the distribution number counter is set in step S1106. It is determined whether the value of area HC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S1106, that is, if the value of the distribution number counter area HC is "1", the distribution member 358 is displaced to the position on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 in step S1107. let In the following step S1108, the timer counter TC is set to "1000" (corresponding to 2 seconds). After executing step S1108 or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1106, the main distribution setting process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, that is, if the distribution member 358 is located on the distribution side to the V winning area 356, the value of the second timer counter area TC2 is set to "0" in step S1109. It is determined whether or not the period for positioning the distribution member 358 on the distribution side to the V winning area 356 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, the distribution member 358 is moved to the position on the distribution side to the discharge area 357 in step S1110, and then the value of the distribution number counter area HC is subtracted by 1 in step S1111. Execute processing. After executing step S1111 or when a negative determination is made in step S1109, the main distribution setting process ends.

Next, the V winning process will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<V-winning processing>
In the V-winning process, first in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the V-winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1202, and based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 362 provided in the second variable winning device 32B, it is determined whether or not a V winning has occurred (the relevant It is determined whether the game ball has passed through the detection area of the detection sensor 362.

If it is determined that a V winning has occurred, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the V winning is valid. The validity period is a predetermined period, and for example, the period during which the special winning game is being executed or the V side distribution period of the distribution member 358 is set as the validity period. If it is determined that it is not within the valid period, the process proceeds to step S1204, where an error command is set as a transmission target to the notification/performance control device 82, and thereafter, the main V winning process is ended. The set error command is sent to the notification/performance control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21), and the notification/performance control device 82 controls the display so that a predetermined error notification is executed. The device 212, the display light emitting section 63, and the speaker section 64 are controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the valid period, the process advances to step S1205, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114. In the following step S1206, the V winning command is set as a transmission target to the notification/performance control device 82. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/presentation control device 82 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is notified/presented in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 21). It is transmitted to the control device 82. When the notification/performance control device 82 receives the V winning command, the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 63, and the speaker unit 64 perform effects such as notifying the occurrence of the V winning or congratulating the V winning. The display control device 212 and the like are controlled so as to be executed.

After executing step S1206, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 or a negative determination is made in step S1202, the main V winning process ends.

Returning to the explanation of the end processing of the special winning game in FIG. 28, if it is determined in step S1001 that the V winning flag is stored, the process advances to step S1002, and the process of setting the V winning flag corresponding to the special winning type Execute. This process is performed by referring to the various special winning flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and storing the V winning flag corresponding to the special winning flags in the various flag storage areas 114e. For example, the special winning game to be terminated is triggered by winning the special winning result A, and if the special winning flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the V winning flag is used as the V winning flag. If the flag A is stored and the special winning flag B is stored, the V winning flag B is stored as the V winning flag, and if the special winning flag C is stored, the V winning flag C is stored as the V winning flag. Store. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 112 to grasp that the V jackpot game should be started and the type of the V jackpot game.

In the subsequent step S1003, processing is executed to erase the V winning flag, various special winning flags, and special winning game flags stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. In the subsequent step S1004, the V winning command is set as a transmission target to the notification/performance control device 82, and thereafter, the end processing of the special winning game is ended. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification/production control device 82 that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game. It is transmitted to the notification/effect control device 82 through external output processing. The notification/performance control device 82 controls the display so that, when the V winning command is received, the pattern display device 41 or the like executes a performance that notifies the start of the V jackpot game and the type of the V jackpot game. Controls the device 212 and the like.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1001 (determined that the V winning flag is not stored), in step S1005, various special winning flags and special winning games stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114 are determined. A process for erasing the flag is executed, and then the process for ending the special winning game is ended.

Next, the transition process to the jackpot gaming state in step S305 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 31. Of the various processes included in this transition process, the description of those similar to those included in the process of transition to the special winning game state described above will be simplified as appropriate.

<Transition process to jackpot gaming state>
In the transition process to the jackpot game state, first in step S1301, it is determined whether or not a special win game is being executed. If it is determined that the special winning game is being executed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is ended, whereas if it is determined that the special winning game is not being executed, the process advances to step S1302, and the process of transitioning to the main jackpot game state is terminated. Determine whether it is being executed.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, it is determined in step S1303 whether or not various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not the V jackpot game should be started. If it is determined that the various V winning flags are not stored, the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags (step S609 in FIG. 24) are stored in the various flag storage area 114e. That is, it is determined whether a normal jackpot game that is not a V jackpot game should be started.

If it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is terminated, while if it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process advances to step S1305 and the game cycle is started. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing. If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the game round, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is ended.

If it is determined in step S1305 that it is the end timing of the game round, or if it is determined in step S1303 that various V winning flags are stored, the process advances to step S1306 and a jackpot game start process is executed. In the start process, a jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e of the RAM 114, and an opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S1307, round setting processing is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the 3R flag A, 3R flag B, 9R flag, 3RV flag, 5RV flag, and 10RV flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the process advances to step S1308, and the round counter area RC1 provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is set. Specifically, if the 3R flags A and B are stored, "3" is set in the round counter area RC1, and if the 9R flag is stored, "9" is set in the round counter area RC1. If the 3RV flag is stored, "2" is set in the round counter area RC1, and if the 5RV flag is stored, "4" is set in the round counter area RC1, and the 10RV flag is stored. If so, "9" is set in the round counter area RC1.

After executing step S1307, an opening command is set in step S1308, and an external signal setting process is executed in step S1309, after which the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

Further, if it is determined in step S1302 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S1310, and it is determined whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not elapsed, the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1311, and a jackpot opening/closing process for controlling opening/closing of the first big winning opening 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is executed. In the jackpot opening/closing process, when the first jackpot 321 of the first variable winning device 32A is closed, the drive for the opening/closing door 322 is activated on condition that the round number counter RC is "1" or more. By bringing the part 323 into the driving state, the first big prize opening 321 is opened. In addition, if the first grand prize opening 321 is open, a predetermined time (30 seconds) has passed since the first grand prize opening 321 was opened, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won. On the condition that it is, the driving state of the driving part 323 is stopped and the first big prize opening 321 is closed.

After executing the jackpot opening/closing process in step S1311, it is determined in step S1312 whether or not the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0". Furthermore, in step S1313, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter area RC1 is not "0" or if the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the main jackpot gaming state is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, in step S1314, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed, and then the main jackpot is played. The transition process to the gaming state ends. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S1314 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

<Transition processing at the end of jackpot game>
In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first in step S1401, the continuous number counter CC stored in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is updated. Specifically, "1" is added to the continuous number counter CC. The consecutive number of wins counter CC is a counter for specifying the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called number of consecutive wins) during the high-frequency support mode.

In the following step S1402, it is determined whether the 3R flag B, 9R flag, or various V winning flags are stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a jackpot in which the support mode shifts to high-frequency support after the end of the jackpot game is stored.

If it is determined that any of the above flags is stored, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot or special win during the high frequency support mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process advances to step S1404.

In step S1404, it is determined whether the value of the above-mentioned continuous number counter CC has reached an upper limit (limiter). If a negative determination is made in step S1404, the process advances to step S1405 to perform setting processing for the game number counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114. Regarding the number of games counter GC, there is a number of games counter GC1 for the first operation port for counting the number of times of execution of the game related to the first operation port in the high frequency support mode, and a second number of games counter GC1 for the first operation port in the high frequency support mode. A game count counter GC2 for the second operation port for counting the number of times the game operation related to the operation port 34 is executed, and a game number counter GC2 for the first operation port 33 and related to the second operation port 34 in the high frequency support mode. It is roughly divided into a game number counter GC3 for counting the number of times the game is executed. For example, if the current jackpot result is a 3R jackpot B, the game number counters GC1 to GC3 are each set to "100" (see FIGS. 15 and 17).

In the following step S1406, a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and then a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 114e, and then a high-frequency support mode flag is stored in the high-frequency support mode to notify the notification/production control device 82 that the support mode will shift to the high-frequency support mode. The command (high-frequency support setting information) is set as a command to be sent to the notification/effect control device 82. After executing step S1406, the process advances to step S1407. In step S1407, the various jackpot flags, V winning flag, and jackpot game flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e are erased, and the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1404, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1404, that is, if the value of the continuous number counter CC has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S1408. In step S1408, the continuous number counter CC is reset (cleared to zero). Thereafter, after erasing the flag in step S1407, the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1403, if a negative determination is made in step S1403, that is, if the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot or special win in the low-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1409, and the RAM 114 Setting processing of the game number counter GC provided in the various counter areas 114d is performed. For example, if the current jackpot result is 3R jackpot B, set the number of games counter GC1 to "7," the number of games counter GC2 to "1," and the number of games counter GC3 to "7" (Fig. 15 and (See Figure 17). Thereafter, after executing each process of steps S1406 and S1407, the transition process at the end of the main jackpot is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1402, if a negative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if the 3R flag A is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the process advances to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot during the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1410, after executing each of the processes in step S1408 and step S1407, the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is ended. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1410, after executing each process of steps S1404 to S1408, the transition process at the end of the main jackpot game is ended.

Next, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode in step S708 in the final display process in FIG. 25 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 33.

In the high-frequency support mode termination process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether a high-frequency support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. That is, it is determined whether the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is not stored, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode is terminated, while if it is determined that the high-frequency support flag is stored, the process advances to step S1502. A process of subtracting "1" from the value of the number of games counter GC is executed. Specifically, if the current game time is the game time related to the first operating port 33, the values of the game number counters GC1, GC3 are subtracted by "1", and the current game time is assigned to the second operating port 34. If this is the game time, the values of the game number counters GC2 and GC3 are subtracted by "1".

In the following step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the number of games counter GC (specifically, any one of the number of games counters GC1 to GC3) is "0". If it is determined that the value of the number of games counter GC is not "0", the process for ending the high-frequency support mode is ended. If it is determined that the value of the number of games counter GC is "0", the process advances to step S1504, and the high frequency support flag stored in the various flag storage areas 114e is deleted. As a result, the high-frequency support mode ends, and the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode.

After executing step S1504, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the through gate display section 44 is currently displaying a changing pattern. If it is determined that the symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, the process advances to step S1506, and it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery related to the through gate 35 is an open result. If it is an open result, the process advances to step S1507, and a process is executed to change the picture that is stopped and displayed on the through gate display section 44 to one corresponding to the open result. That is, in the present embodiment, if the high-frequency support mode ends while the through-gate display unit 44 is displaying a changing pattern, the stop result is forcibly rewritten to a failure result. Therefore, even if the winning result is obtained in the opening lottery held before the end of the high-frequency support mode, the accessory opening/closing game of the electric accessory 34a based on the winning result will be executed after the end of the high-frequency support mode. Not done. Note that if the high-frequency support mode ends while the through-gate display section 44 is displaying the failure result as a final result, the above-mentioned change will not be executed because the stop result has already been displayed.

After executing step S1507 or when a negative determination is made in step S1506, the process advances to step S1508, and a process is executed to end the fluctuating display of the pattern on the through gate display section 44. That is, if the high-frequency support mode ends while the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the through-gate display section 44, the variable display of the pattern on the through-gate display section 44 is ended at the end timing of the support mode. do. As a result, the state in which winnings to the second operating port 34 are given preferential treatment ends with the end of the high-frequency support mode.

After executing step S1508 or when a negative determination is made in step S1505, the process advances to step S1509, and a high-frequency support end command is sent to notify the notification/production control device 82 that the high-frequency support mode has ended. - Set as a command to be sent to the production control device 82. After executing step S1509, the process for ending the high-frequency support mode is ended.

Next, the power support process in step S306 in the normal process (FIG. 21) will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS. 34 and 35.

<Processing for electric support>
As shown in FIG. 34, in the electric role support process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag is stored in the supported flag storage area of the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The support flag is a flag that is stored when switching the electric accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state, and is erased when returning to the closed state.

If the supporting flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1602, and it is determined whether or not the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the open lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a is won, and is erased when the supporting flag is stored.

If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1603, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TCS provided in the various counter areas 114d of the RAM 114 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", this electronic support process is immediately terminated.

If the value of the timer counter TCS is "0", the process advances to step S1604, and it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section 44. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1605, the off display is set and the timer counter TCS is set to "250" (equivalent to 0.5 sec), and then the main power support process is ended. . By setting the out-of-line display, the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section 44 is ended with the out-of-line display stopped, and this out-of-line display continues for 0.5 seconds.

If the value of the timer counter TCS is "0" and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process advances to step S1606, and it is determined whether or not the value of the number SN of accessory hold memory is greater than "0". If the value of the number SN of accessory items being stored is "0", the present electronic role support processing is ended as is. If the value of the number of stored accessories SN is greater than "0", it is determined in step S1607 whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode.

If the high-frequency support mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, and the process advances to step S1608. In step S1608, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to provide support using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric role holding area 114c is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area AE is stored in the validity table storage area 113a of the ROM 113. The open lottery is performed by referring to the high-frequency support mode lottery table. Also, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TCS is set to "100" (corresponding to 0.2 seconds). Note that the timer counter TCS is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section 44 continues until the value of the timer counter TCS becomes "0", that is, for 0.2 seconds.

In the following step S1609, it is determined whether the result of the open lottery in step S1608 is a winning result (opening result), that is, a support win. If the support is not won, the process for this electronic support is terminated. If it is a support win, a support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1610, and the present electronic role support process ends.

If the low frequency support mode is in effect, a negative determination is made in step S1607, and the process advances to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to provide support using the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the electric role holding area 114c is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area AE is stored in the validity table storage area 113a of the ROM 113. The open lottery is performed by referring to the lottery table for the low-frequency support mode that has been set up. Also, at the same time as the opening lottery, the timer counter TCS is set to "20000 to 30000" (corresponding to 400 to 600 seconds). Thereafter, the variable display of the picture on the through gate display section 44 continues until the value of the timer counter TCS becomes "0", that is, for 400 to 600 seconds.

In the following step S1612, it is determined whether the result of the open lottery in step S1611 is a winning result (opening result), that is, a support win. If the support is not won, the process for this electronic support is terminated. If it is a support win, a support win flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114 in step S1613, and the present electronic role support process ends.

Please note that the probability of winning support in the high-frequency support mode (190/200 in detail) is higher than the probability of winning support in the low-frequency support mode (1/200 in detail). mode is given preferential treatment.

Returning to the explanation of step S1602, if the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, and the process proceeds to step S1614, where the value of the timer counter TCS is set to "0". Determine whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", the pattern is being displayed in a variable manner on the through-gate display section 44, so the main electronic win support process is immediately terminated. If the value of the timer counter TCS is "0", a win display is set in step S1615. As a result, the variable display of the symbols on the through gate display section 44 is ended with the winning display stopped. In the following step S1616, a support flag is set in the various flag storage area 114e, and after erasing the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e, the present electronic role support process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1601, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if the supporting flag is stored in the various flag storage area 114e of the RAM 114, the process advances to step S1317, and the electric accessory 34a is opened/closed. After executing the electric role opening/closing process for control, the main electric role support process is ended. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 35, the electric role opening/closing process will be described.

<Electric opening/closing process>
In the electric accessory opening/closing process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 34a is open, the process advances to step S1702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the final display of the symbol on the actuation opening display section 43 in the final game round in the high-frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S1702, the process advances to step S1703.

In step S1703, it is determined whether the number of winnings after opening the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit ("10" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S1703, the process advances to step S1704, and it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TCS is "0".

If the value of the timer counter TCS is not "0", the main power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TCS is "0" or if it is determined in step S1703 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S1705. In step S1705, a closing process is performed to switch (return) the electric accessory 34a to the closed state. Thereafter, in step S1706, the support flag stored in the various flag storage area 114e is erased, and the present electronic role opening/closing process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1702, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1702, that is, if it is the timing at which the final display of the symbol on the operating opening display section 43 ends in the last game in the high-frequency support mode, step The opening/closing process is executed in S1705, and then the supporting flag is cleared in step S1706, and the present electric role opening/closing process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is forcibly switched to the closed state, and the second support mode after switching to the low-frequency support mode is It is configured such that it is virtually impossible to win a prize through the second operating port 34.

In addition, if it is possible to configure the second operating port 34 to be virtually impossible to win after switching to the low-frequency support mode, the timing for forcibly switching the electric accessory 34a to the closed state is determined. may be changed arbitrarily. For example, it is also possible to forcibly switch the electric accessory 34a to the closed state when the final game in the high-frequency support mode is the timing when the final display of the pattern on the actuation opening display section 43 starts. It is.

Returning to the explanation of step S1701, if the electric accessory 34a is not in the open state, a negative determination is made in step S1701, and the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether the timer counter TCS is "0". If the timer counter TCS is not "0", the main power switch opening/closing process is immediately ended. When the timer counter TCS is "0", in step S1708, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed.

Thereafter, in step S1709, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is in the high-frequency support mode, the timer counter TCS is set to "1500" (corresponding to 3 seconds) in step S1710, and then the main power opening/closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is in the low-frequency support mode, the timer counter TCS is set to "40" (corresponding to 0.08 sec) in step S1410, and then the main power opening/closing process is ended.

<About the basic game flow>
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

As already explained, in the normal gaming state where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it is impossible to expect a prize to be won through the second operating port 34. For this reason, the player plays the game by hitting the game ball to the left in a so-called left-handed manner, aiming to hit the first operating port 33 with a prize.

When a prize is won through the first actuating port 33, a winning lottery is executed based on the winning. If a 3R jackpot A or a 3R jackpot B is won by the lottery, the first variable winning device 32A shifts to a jackpot game state in which it is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (for example, three rounds). Since only game balls flowing down the right route can win prizes in the first variable prize winning device 32A, the player increases the amount of rotational operation of the firing handle 60 and launches the game balls along the right route to play the game. (So-called right-handed hitting).

Details will be described later, but whether this jackpot game state is triggered by 3R jackpot A or 3R jackpot B is determined by the performance executed on the symbol display device 41 etc. during the jackpot play state. shall be made clear to the person concerned. After the end of the jackpot game state, if the 3R jackpot A is the trigger, the game shifts to (returns to) the normal game state. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed hitting, and plays the game again with the aim of winning the jackpot based on winning the first operating port 33. On the other hand, if the current jackpot game state is triggered by 3R jackpot B, the game shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

Regarding the special game states, there is a first special game state in which the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode and the reference number of game ends related to the second operating port 34 is "1", and a first special game state in which the support mode becomes a high-frequency support mode and the reference number of game ends related to the second operating port 34 is "1". Obtained during the second special game state where the reference number of game ends related to the second operation port 34 is "100" and the first special game state or the second special game state where the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. A third special game state is formed, in which the game round related to the second operating port 34 is executed due to the hold related to the second operating port 34 that has been made. After the jackpot gaming state triggered by the 3R jackpot B during the normal gaming state ends, the game shifts to the first special gaming state.

In the first special game state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, which makes it easier to win a prize at the second operating port 34. Only game balls flowing down the right route can be won into the second operating port 34. For this reason, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification is executed to urge the player to continue hitting right even after the end of the jackpot game.

The first special game state continues until the game round related to the second actuation port 34 is completed for the end standard number of times (one time). As already explained, in the lottery based on winnings in the second operating port 34, preferential treatment is given so that the probability of a special win is higher than in the lottery based on winnings in the first operating port 33. Including this, the actual probability of winning will rapidly increase from 1/200 to 1/3.

During the first special game state, the game round related to the second operating port 34 is executed only once. Therefore, the probability of a winning result during the first special game state is approximately 1/3. If a game in the first special game state results in a loss, the game moves to a third special game state. In this embodiment, the second operating port 34 has a holding function that sets the upper limit of the number of holdings to four. Therefore, if four pieces of pending information related to the second operating port 34 are stored at the end of the high-frequency support mode (at the end of the first game round related to the second operating port 34), the high-frequency support mode Even after the end of the game, it is possible to receive a lottery based on winnings in the second operation port 34 four times. In other words, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and is internally in the normal game state, the special game state is changed by the number of holds related to the second operating port 34 at the end of the high-frequency support mode. be extended (continued). Incidentally, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special prize in four rounds of lottery for the second operating port 34 is approximately 80%. The total continuation rate, including the high-frequency support mode (one session), is approximately 87%.

If all four game times during the third special game state result in a loss and all the pending information related to the second operating port 34 is digested, the normal game state will be returned to. In other words, if the reserve associated with the second operating port 34 is used up without any special winning or jackpot occurring, the special gaming state is demoted to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed hitting, and plays the game again with the aim of winning the jackpot based on winning the first operating port 33.

On the other hand, if any of the special wins B to C occurs during the third special game state, the game shifts to the special win game state. In the special winning game state, a special winning game is executed in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened and closed in the above-described high frequency winning mode. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can be won in the second variable winning device 32B, if a special win occurs, the player will play the game by hitting the ball to the right. When a V winning occurs in the special winning game, after the special winning game ends, the first variable winning device 32A opens and closes the V winning device over multiple rounds (2nd round, 4th round, 9th round). Shift to jackpot gaming state.

Incidentally, the second operating port 34 in this embodiment is disposed in the middle of the right route (see FIG. 4), and when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game flow down the right route. The ball is configured so that it cannot bypass the second operating port 34. The opening time (1.8 sec) of the second variable winning device 32B when a special winning game is executed in the high frequency winning mode is longer than the firing cycle of the game ball (0.6 sec), and If it is fired, it is possible to easily generate a prize in the second variable prize winning device 32B.

In addition, under the high-frequency winning mode, the period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state and the period in which the distribution member 358 is arranged on the V winning area 356 side overlap, and the second variable winning device 32B The winning game balls in the device 32B are easily distributed to the V winning area 356 side. Therefore, by generating a win in the second variable winning device 32B, a V win will definitely occur or almost always occur. In other words, when a special winning occurs, it is almost certain that a V jackpot will occur. After the V jackpot game state triggered by the special win in the third special game state ends, the game shifts to the first special game state.

In this way, the probability of occurrence of a V jackpot is the same as or similar to the probability of winning a special winning in the winning/losing lottery for the second operating port 34, but the probability of winning the special winning is the same as the probability of winning a special winning in the winning/losing drawing for the first operating port 33. The probability of winning the jackpot is 1/3, which is higher than the probability of winning the jackpot. Therefore, in the special game state in which the game round mainly related to the second operating port 34 progresses, it is possible to generate a jackpot (V jackpot) with a high probability. In other words, the high-frequency support mode in this pachinko machine 10 is a gaming state equivalent to the high-probability mode (so-called variable probability state or high-probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is increased, as perceived by the player.

Here, if any of the special wins A to C occurs during the first special game state, the game shifts to the special win game state. In the special winning game state, a special winning game is executed in which the second variable winning device 32B is opened and closed in the above-described high frequency winning mode. Since only game balls flowing down the right route can be won in the second variable winning device 32B, if a special win occurs, the player will play the game by hitting the ball to the right. When a V winning occurs in the special winning game, after the special winning game ends, the first variable winning device 32A opens and closes the V winning device over multiple rounds (2nd round, 4th round, 9th round). Shift to jackpot gaming state.

When a V jackpot occurs, the jackpot type is divided into 2RV jackpot, 4RV jackpot, and 9RV jackpot, which have different numbers of rounds, but in all of these, the support mode after the V jackpot game ends shifts to high-frequency support mode. Whether or not this is the case depends on the relationship between the special game state in which the player is staying and the operation of the limiter.

Specifically, if a 2RV jackpot, 4RV jackpot, or 9RV jackpot occurs as a result of a special win in the first special gaming state or second special gaming state compatible with high-frequency support mode, the The second special game state is entered on the condition that the number of successive jackpots has not reached the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter is not activated). On the other hand, if a 2RV jackpot, 4RV jackpot, or 9RV jackpot occurs as a result of a special win during the first special gaming state or second special gaming state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, the A transition to the third special game state is made on the condition that the number of consecutive jackpots reaches the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter operation). If a 2RV jackpot, 4RV jackpot, or 9RV jackpot occurs as a result of a special win during the first special gaming state or second special gaming state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, the number of consecutive jackpots under the high-frequency support mode will be increased. A transition to the second special game state is made on the condition that the above-mentioned upper limit has not been reached (limiter is not activated). Further, when a special win in the third special game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode becomes a 2RV jackpot, a 4RV jackpot, or a 9RV jackpot, the game shifts to the first special game state.

In addition, in the win/fail lottery related to the second operating port 34, a jackpot lottery is also held in conjunction with a special win lottery, and it is possible to win a jackpot. In this case, a jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 32A is opened and closed is executed. After the end of the jackpot game, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode on the condition that the number of consecutive jackpots under the high-frequency support mode does not reach the above-mentioned upper limit (limiter is not activated), or the first special game state Transition to the second special game state. Specifically, when the limiter is not activated, the game moves to the second special game state, and when the limiter is activated, the game moves to the third special game state.

In other words, even by winning a jackpot in the special game state through the winning/fail lottery for the second operation port 34, it is possible to loop a game state in which a V jackpot can occur with high probability. However, in this case, the jackpot winning probability is 1/200, which is lower than the special winning winning probability, so in the special game state, the main game is a special winning → V jackpot.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, since the special winning result is also included in the win/fail result related to the first operating port 33, a special win based on the winning/fail drawing related to the first operating port 33 may occur in the normal gaming state. . However, in the special winning game in this case, since the second variable winning device 32B is controlled to open and close in a low frequency winning mode, a V winning does not occur and a V jackpot game is not executed.

As already explained, when the game ball is fired to the right route, winning into the first operating port 33 is avoided. However, immediately after transition to the special gaming state, there is a possibility that the pending information related to the first operating port 33 obtained during the normal gaming state remains, and the pending information related to the second operating port 34 has not been obtained. There is. Although the configuration is such that the pending information related to the second operating port 34 is digested with priority over the pending information related to the first operating port 33, the pending information related to the second operating port 34 is not acquired. If not, the game round related to the first operating port 33 can be executed in the special game state. Although there is a difference in the degree of advantage so that the game results related to the second operating port 34 are more advantageous to the player than the game results related to the first operating port 33, the game results related to the second operating port 34 are It is feared that if the high-frequency support mode ends without being executed or with an insufficient number of executions, it will be a great disadvantage to the player.

In this regard, in this embodiment, as already explained, the reference number of terminations of the high-frequency support mode is set for each operating port, and during the special game state, the number of games related to the first operating port 33 (for details, This prevents the high-frequency support mode from ending before the game session related to the second operation port 34 is executed even if the game session (4 times) is executed.

If there are any reservations related to the first operating port 33 remaining after the transition to the special game state, the time period for displaying the fluctuation of the symbol on the operating port display section 43 is shortened so that the reservations are quickly cleared. One of its features is that it has a structure that allows for Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 37, a supplementary explanation will be given of the relationship between each gaming state and the variable display mode, which is a mode for determining the variable display time of the symbols on the actuation port display section 43.

<Fluctuating display mode>
The variable display mode has a first variable display mode corresponding to a normal game state and a third special game state, and a second variable display mode corresponding to a first special game state and a second special game state. . Considering that the normal game state and the third special game state correspond to the low-frequency support mode, and the first special game state and the second special game state correspond to the high-frequency support mode, the first variable display It can also be said that the mode is a variable display mode associated with the low-frequency support mode, and the second variable display mode is a variable display mode associated with the high-frequency support mode.

In the first variable display mode, while the variable display time of the symbol on the display section AS for the first operating port is differentiated according to the game result (missing result, winning result), The variable display time of the symbols on the display section BS is unified so that it is the same for any game result (lost result, winning result). Specifically, when the game time related to the first operating port 33 is a losing result, the variable display time is configured to be 2 to 15 seconds. Specifically, the variable display time is set to become shorter as the amount of subsequent pending information related to the first operating port 33 increases at the start of a game round. The variable display time is configured to be 30 to 60 seconds for a part of the game round related to the first operating port 33 that is a winning result (missing reach) and for a part of the game that is a winning result. Regarding the variable display time, a relatively long one is likely to be selected in the case of a winning result, and a relatively short one is likely to be selected in the case of a losing result. On the other hand, for the game rounds related to the second operating port 34, the variable display time is configured to be 30 to 35 seconds, so that there is no difference depending on the game result.

Even in the second variable display mode, while the variable display time of the symbol on the display section AS for the first operating port is differentiated according to the game result (missing result, winning result), The variable display time of the symbols on the display section BS is unified so that it is the same for any game result (lost result, winning result). Specifically, when the game time related to the first operating port 33 is a losing result, the variable display time is configured to be 1 sec. On the other hand, when the game round related to the first operating port 33 is a winning result, the variable display time is configured to be 20 to 25 seconds. Further, regarding the game round related to the second operating port 34, the variable display time is configured to be 20 to 25 seconds regardless of whether the result is a loss or a win.

Next, the flow of the game will be illustrated with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 shows an example of the flow of the game when the special game state loop ends before the limiter operates after the normal game state has transitioned to the special game state, and FIG. 39 shows the flow of the game when the special game state has transitioned from the normal game state to the special game state. This illustrates the flow of the game when the special game state loops until the limiter is activated.

In the example shown in FIG. 38, the jackpot (3R jackpot B) in the normal gaming state triggers a transition to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the first special game corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the second variable display mode is started. transitioning to the state. When the game ball launched to the right route during this first special game state enters the second operating port 34, the game round related to the second operating port 34 is executed, and during the game round, the second Four pieces of pending information regarding the operating port 34 have been newly acquired.

Since the current game run executed in the first special game state corresponds to a winning result, when the first special game state ends, a third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the first variable display mode is activated. is moving to. In the third special game state, one of the remaining pending information related to the second operating port 34 corresponds to a special winning result, and the special winning result is used as a trigger to shift to the special winning game state. A V winning occurs in this special winning game state, and the V winning game is triggered by a transition to a V jackpot gaming state.

After the V jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the first special game state again. The current first special game state also corresponds to a winning result, and all of the remaining pending information related to the second operating port 34 also corresponds to a winning result. Therefore, after transitioning to the first special game state, the game returns to the normal game state via the third special game state.

Next, in the example shown in FIG. 39, the jackpot (3R jackpot B) in the normal gaming state triggers a transition to the jackpot gaming state, and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, the high-frequency support mode and the second variable display mode compatible 1 Transitioning to special game state. When the game ball launched to the right route during this first special game state enters the second operating port 34, the game round related to the second operating port 34 is executed, and during the game round, the second Four pieces of pending information regarding the operating port 34 have been newly acquired.

The current game round executed in the first special game state corresponds to the special winning result. After the first special game state ends, the game shifts to a special win game state, and when a V winning occurs in this special win game state, the game shifts to a V jackpot game state.

After the V jackpot game state ends, a transition is made to a second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode and the second variable display mode. Regarding the second special game state, the end standard number of times is 100, and the winning probability related to the second operating port 34 is 1/3, so the next win in the second special game state is substantially high. becomes. After that, the flow of special winning game state → V jackpot game state → second special game state continues in a loop until the number of consecutive wins becomes the upper limit and the limiter is activated.

When the number of consecutive wins including the first jackpot reaches the upper limit of four, the transition destination after the V jackpot game state ends is the low frequency support mode and the third special game state compatible with the first variable display mode, and the high You will no longer benefit from frequency support. In the third special game state, the game proceeds based on the remaining reservation information (retention information related to the second operating port 34) acquired during the previous second special game state. In the example shown in FIG. 39, all the game times executed during the third special game state correspond to a winning result, and the normal game state is determined based on the fact that all the pending information related to the second operating port 34 has been digested. is returning to.

In this embodiment, the execution mode of the game performance (hereinafter referred to as performance mode) by the symbol display device 41, the speaker section 64, and the display light emitting section 63 is configured to be switched depending on the game state. For each production mode, the image displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, the BGM and sound effects output by the speaker section 64, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting section 63 are defined for each gaming state. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41, an overview of the effects in each gaming state will be explained. FIGS. 40 and 41 are schematic diagrams showing the display screen G in each gaming state.

<Production summary>
As already explained, in the normal game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode and the first variable display mode, the game progresses centering around the game rounds related to the first operating port 33. In this normal game state, the game progresses in the normal performance mode. In the normal performance mode, the symbols displayed on the display screen G correspond to the game times related to the first operating port 33. In other words, on the display screen G, the scrolling display (fluctuating display) of symbols starts in time with the start of the game round related to the first operating port 33, and the symbol combination corresponding to the game result stops in time with the end of the game time. Is displayed.

When a jackpot occurs in the normal game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the active line, and then the state shifts to the jackpot game state. The symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed are the same for 3R jackpot A and 3R jackpot B, and it is difficult to specify which jackpot is the one from the symbol combination.

In the jackpot game state, the production mode is switched from the normal production mode to the jackpot production mode. In the jackpot performance mode, the performance during the jackpot game progresses in the order of opening → round game → ending as the game progresses. In particular, the ending for the first hit varies depending on the type of jackpot. The ending for 3R jackpot A consists of a result notification part that shows the type of jackpot, whereas the ending for 3R jackpot B consists of the above result notification part that shows the type of jackpot, and the first special game state. It consists of an introduction part to the challenge production that will be executed.

In the result notification part, an image of a girl is displayed in the center of the display screen G, and the type of jackpot is notified depending on the success or failure of the girl's transformation. Specifically, if the current jackpot is 3R jackpot A (that is, a jackpot result that does not correspond to the transition to the high-frequency support mode), the jackpot gaming state ends after an image indicating a transformation failure is displayed, Return to normal gaming state. Upon returning to the normal gaming state, the performance mode is switched from the jackpot performance mode to the normal performance mode.

If the current jackpot is 3R jackpot B (that is, the jackpot result corresponding to the transition to high-frequency support mode), an image indicating a successful transformation is displayed, and then the ending progresses from the result notification part to the challenge production introduction part. . Then, with the transition to the first special game state, the performance mode is switched from the jackpot performance mode to the first special performance mode corresponding to the first special performance mode.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the first special performance mode, a chase between the girl and the fairy after the successful transformation starts at the same time as the start of the game round related to the second operation port 34. If the game round corresponds to a special win or a jackpot, an image of the captured fairy is displayed and the "V" symbol combination is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, by shifting to the second special game state, the performance mode also corresponds to the second special game state. The performance modes in the second special game state include a continuous performance mode that is set when a special condition (for example, all four subsequent holds are a winning result) during the second special performance mode and the first special game state. is provided.

In the second special effect mode, a red effect is additionally displayed on the outer edge of the display screen G, and the words "Super RUSH" are additionally displayed at the top of the display screen G. These displays inform the player that the second special game state has been entered. On the other hand, in the continuous performance mode, an image of a girl is displayed in the center of the display screen G, a singing performance is performed, and the words "Seven RUSH" are additionally displayed at the top of the display screen G. The continuous performance mode is a performance mode that shifts only when 7 wins are confirmed, and this continuous performance mode continues until the 7 winning games are completed. In other words, the continuous performance mode is a performance mode in which a series of singing performances are performed across each game state of the special game state, special winning game state, and V jackpot game state, and the performance period is larger than that of other performance modes. This is the secured production mode. By performing such a series of singing performances, it is possible to avoid the period of performing the singing performances being half-finished.

If the game run executed in the first special game state does not correspond to either a special hit or a jackpot (if it is a loss), an image of the fairy being missed will be displayed and the words "Failure" will be displayed. is displayed. Thereafter, with the transition to the third special game state, the performance mode is also switched to the third special performance mode corresponding to the third special game state.

In the third special effect mode, a blue effect is additionally displayed on the outer edge of the display screen G, and the word "RUSH" is additionally displayed at the top of the display screen G. These displays inform the player that the third special game state has been entered.

In this embodiment, the game ball launch destination (right route/left route) that is advantageous to the player changes depending on the game state, and the preferred game ball launch timing differs. In view of these circumstances, the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 is configured to execute processing for guiding the firing operation in accordance with processing for production in each gaming state. Here, various processes executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 as part of regular processing will be explained. First, the special ending process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The special ending process is a process executed during a jackpot game state that results in a jackpot result in the normal game state.

<Special ending processing>
In the special ending process, first, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a jackpot ending command has been received from the main controller 81. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, the process advances to step S1802. In step S1802, ending start processing is executed. In the ending start process, an ending command, specifically an ending command received from the main control device 81 with information indicating an outline of the ending effect, is sent to the display control device 212, and the ending command is sent from the speaker unit 64. The output of BGM is started, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting section 63 is switched to the light emitting mode for ending. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start the ending display effect (video) based on the instruction by this ending command.

At the time when the ending starts, the first variable winning device 32A is already in the closed state. For this reason, if you continue to shoot the game balls toward the right route even after the ending starts, the number of balls you have will decrease. In consideration of such circumstances, the gaming machine shown in this embodiment is provided with a function for notifying the player whether or not the situation is such that the game ball should be shot to the right route. In the following explanation, the notification that the situation is such that the game ball should be fired to the right route will be simply referred to as "right-handed hitting notification."

The mode of right-handed hitting notification can be broadly divided into two modes. In detail, the right-handed hit notification is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen G (see FIGS. 43(a) and 43(b)), and the right-handed hit notification is displayed in the corner of the display screen G. It is roughly divided into the right-hand hit notification (small) that is displayed in a small size (see FIG. 43(c)). When the right-handed hitting notification (large) is executed, the speaker unit 64 outputs "Start right-handed hitting" as a message urging the player to shoot the game ball toward the right route.

In the jackpot game state, the right hit notification (large) is executed just before the transition from the opening to the round game, and after that, the right hit notification (large) is executed so as not to interfere with the jackpot video displayed during the round game. ) ends, and the right-handed hit notification (small) starts.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 42, after the ending start process is executed in step S1802, the process advances to step S1803. In step S1802, right hit notification (small) end processing is executed. In the right-handed hitting notification (small) termination process, a right-handed hitting notification (small) termination command is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 hides the right-handed hitting notification (small) image currently being displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 based on receiving the right-handed hitting notification (small) end command. As a result, right-handed notification is avoided during the result notification part that constitutes the ending. After executing the process in step S1803, the special ending process is immediately ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if the ending command for the jackpot has not been received, the process advances to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the result notification part is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the process advances to step S1805. In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current jackpot gaming state is a jackpot result (3R jackpot result B) corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, that is, whether or not the jackpot result that triggered the transition to the current jackpot gaming state is It is determined whether it is the timing to notify whether or not to move to the first special game state corresponding to the support mode (win/fail result notification timing). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1805, the process advances to step S1806, and after executing the success/failure result notification process, the special ending process ends. In the success/failure result notification process, a command for notification of a win/fail result is output to the display control device 212, a sound effect for notification of a win/fail result is output from the speaker unit 64, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is changed to a light emission mode for notification of a win/fail result. Switch to

If a negative determination is made in step S1805, the process advances to step S1807. In step S1807, it is determined whether it is time to move to the challenge effect introduction part. As already explained, the ending part of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to 3R jackpot result A is composed of the result notification part, while the ending part of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to 3R jackpot result B consists of the first half of the ending. It consists of a result notification part and a challenge performance introduction part, which makes up the second half. If a negative determination is made in step S1807, the special ending process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, the process for transitioning to the challenge effect introduction part is executed in step S1808, and then the special ending process is ended. In the transition process to the challenge effect introduction part, a challenge effect introduction part transition command is output to the display control device 212, the BGM for the challenge effect introduction part is output from the speaker unit 64, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is challenged. Switch to the lighting mode for the production introduction part.

Returning to the explanation of step S1804, if a negative determination is made in step S1804, that is, if the result notification part is not in progress, the process advances to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the challenge effect introduction part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1809, the special ending process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1809, the process advances to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the right-handed hit notification (large). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, the process for starting the right-handed hit notification (large) is executed in step S1811, and then the special ending process is ended.

In the right-handed hitting notification (large) start process in step S1811, a right-handed hitting notification (large) start command is output to the display control device 212, and a right-handed hitting notification message is output from the speaker unit 64. In the display control device 212, based on receiving the right-handed hitting notification (large) start command, an image for right-handed hitting notification (large) is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 (see FIG. 43(a)). do. This right hit notification (large) is continued until the game round related to the second operating port 34 is started after the transition to the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. When transitioning from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state via the jackpot gaming state, the number of pending information related to the second operating port 34 becomes 0 in most cases. For this reason, the right-handed notification (large) that was started during the challenge effect introduction part is not canceled immediately after transition to the first special game state, but the suspended information is determined by winning the second operating port 34. This will continue until it is obtained.

Returning to the explanation of step S1810, if a negative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if it is not the timing to start right-handed hitting notification (large), the process advances to step S1812. In step S1812, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the ending. If a negative determination is made in step S1812, the special ending process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1812, a challenge effect start process is executed in step S1813, and then this special ending process is ended. In the challenge performance start process, a challenge performance start command is output to the display control device 212, the speaker unit 64 starts outputting BGM corresponding to the challenge performance (more specifically, the standby part), and the display light emitting unit 63 changes the light emission mode. Switch to the lighting mode that corresponds to the challenge production (for details, see the standby part). The display control device 212 starts displaying the video for the challenge performance on the symbol display device 41, specifically, the video display for the standby part, on the basis of receiving the challenge performance start command (see FIG. 40).

The challenge performance includes the above-mentioned standby part that is executed until the game round starts based on winning at the second actuation port 34, and transition from the standby part in accordance with the start of the game round based on the winning at the second actuation port 34. It consists of a main part and a main part. Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the first special effect mode process, which is the process for executing the challenge effect described above, will be described. The first special effect mode process is a process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/effect control device 82 as part of regular processing.

<Processing for the first special effect mode>
In the process for the first special effect mode, first, in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the main part of the challenge effect is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S1901, the process advances to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether either a variation start command for the first operating port 33 or a variation start command for the second operating port 34 corresponding to a jackpot or special win has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1902, the process for the first special effect mode is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1902, a standby part termination process is executed in step S1903, and a transition process to the main part of the challenge performance is executed in the following step S1904.

In the transition process to the main part, a main part start command is output to the display control device 212, the speaker unit 64 starts outputting BGM corresponding to the main part, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is changed to correspond to the main part. Switch to the lighting mode. Based on receiving the main part start command, the display control device 212 switches the display of the video for the challenge effect and the video display for the standby part on the symbol display device 41 to the video display for the main part.

Thereafter, in step S1905, the right-handed hit notification (large) end process is executed, and in step S1906, the right-handed hit notification (small) start process is executed, and then the process for the first special effect mode is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S1901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1901, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether a fluctuation end command has been received from the main controller 81. If a negative determination is made in step S1907, a challenge effect progress process is executed in step S1908, and the process for the first special effect mode is ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1907, a challenge effect end process is executed in step S1909, and then the process for the first special effect mode is ended. Here, the challenge performance progressing process will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 45 to 50.

<Progress processing for challenge production>
The challenge performance is roughly divided into the first half up to the notification of whether the challenge performance is successful or not, and the second half after the notification of the success or failure of the challenge performance. The process consists of step S2001) and second half part processing (step S2002 in FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 46, in the first half part processing, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the first half part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process for the first half part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not a step-up effect constituting the main part is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2102, the process for the first half of this process is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process advances to step S2103.

In step S2103, it is determined whether or not the result of the challenge performance, that is, the winning result indicating whether the game round being executed is a winning result (special winning result or jackpot result) is being reported. . In the challenge performance, if the result of the challenge performance is a special hit or jackpot result, a display indicating the success of the challenge performance (display of catching a fairy) is displayed, and if the result is a failure, a display of the challenge performance is displayed. A display indicating failure (display indicating that the fairy has escaped) is performed (see FIG. 41).

If a negative determination is made in step S2103, the process advances to step S2104. In step S2104, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to notify the success or failure result. If a negative determination is made in step S2104, the process for the first half part is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2104, the process for notifying the success or failure result is executed in step S2105, and then the process for the first half part ends.

In the notification process of step S2105, a result notification command is output to the display control device 212 in order to notify the winning/failure result of the game round prior to the final display of the symbol on the actuating mouth display section 43, and the result notification command is output from the speaker section 64. A sound effect corresponding to the result is output, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting section 63 is switched to a light emitting mode corresponding to the pass/fail result. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 based on receiving the result notification command to clearly indicate the result.

Returning to the explanation of step S2103, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, that is, if the result is being reported, the process advances to step S2106. In step S2106, it is determined whether it is time to move to the second half part. If a negative determination is made in step S2106, the process for the first half part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2106, the process for moving to the second half part is executed in step S2107, and then the process for the first half part ends. Here, the transition process to the latter part will be described with reference to FIG. 47.

In the transition process to the second half part, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether the game result (win/fail result) of the current game round is a winning result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, a process for calculating the number of consecutive wins is executed in step S2202, and a process for starting a performance corresponding to winning results is executed in the subsequent step S2203, and then this transition process is ended. Details of the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins and the start of the performance corresponding to the winning results will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, a process to start a performance corresponding to a missed result is executed in step S2204. In the process of starting a production corresponding to a deviation result, a production start command corresponding to a deviation result is output to the display control device 212, a sound effect for the performance corresponding to a deviation result is output from the speaker section 64, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting unit 63 is changed to correspond to a deviation result. Switch to lighting mode for presentation. In the display control device 212, based on receiving the command to start production corresponding to a missed result, the image of the girl character and the fairy that are being displayed, as well as the failure text are hidden, and the display screen G is changed to the third special game state. Processing is performed to dynamically display the characters "RUSH", which is an image indicating the transition of .

Thereafter, in step S2205, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S2205, the main transition process is directly terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process advances to step S2206, and after executing the right-handed hitting notification (small) termination process, the present transition process is terminated. In other words, if the current game round corresponds to a losing result and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit, all right-handed hitting notifications are configured to end at this point. .

In this embodiment, the success/failure of the challenge performance is notified to the player in the first half of the challenge performance, and if the challenge performance is successful, the player is notified of the jackpot that may occur (substantially more likely to occur) afterward. One of the features is that the number of consecutive wins is notified to the player in the second half. Here, the number of consecutive jackpots is calculated based on the remaining reservation information related to the second operating port 34. Below, before explaining the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins, we will explain the process that is the premise of the calculation process, specifically, the process that is executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 as part of the winning process for the operating opening (see FIG. 20). The preliminary confirmation processing in step S206 and step S213 will be explained. First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48, the preliminary confirmation process for the first operating port in step S206 will be described.

<Pre-confirmation process>
In the preliminary confirmation process for the first operating port, first, in step S2301, a correctness confirmation process is performed with reference to the correctness determination table for the first operating port and the value of the winning random number counter C1 acquired in step S205. . The confirmation process in step S2301 is similar to the validity determination process in step S602 described above, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

If it is confirmed in the validity confirmation process in step S2301 that the current pending information corresponds to the jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2302 and the process proceeds to step S2303. In step S2303, the jackpot type is confirmed with reference to the jackpot type table for the first operating port and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in step S205. The type confirmation process in step S2303 is similar to the type determination process in step S606 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2304, and in step S207, the process of storing the jackpot information in the first pending command scheduled to be sent is executed, and the present preliminary confirmation process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2302, if a negative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the current hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the process advances to step S2305. If the current hold information corresponds to the special winning result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the special winning type is confirmed with reference to the special winning type table for the first operating port and the value of the special winning type counter C3 acquired in step S205. The type confirmation process in step S2306 is similar to the type determination process in step S612 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Thereafter, the process advances to step S2307, where a process is executed to store special winning information in the first pending command scheduled to be transmitted in step S207, and the present preliminary confirmation process is ended.

If the current pending information does not correspond to either a jackpot result or a special win result, that is, if it corresponds to a losing result, a negative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, it is determined whether the current variable display mode is the first variable display mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2308, this preliminary confirmation process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, the process advances to step S2309. In step S2309, reach confirmation processing is performed with reference to the off-reach determination table and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS acquired in step S205. That is, check whether or not a missed reach has occurred, and if a missed reach occurs, its outline.

If it is confirmed that a missed reach occurs, an affirmative determination is made in step S2310 and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, a process is executed to store information indicating an outline of the occurrence of a reach-out in the first pending command scheduled to be transmitted in step S207, and this preliminary confirmation process is ended.

Next, the preliminary confirmation process for the second operating port in step S213 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 49.

In the preliminary confirmation process for the second operating port, first, in step S2401, a correctness confirmation process is performed with reference to the correctness determination table for the second operating port and the value of the winning random number counter C1 acquired in step S212. . The confirmation process in step S2401 is similar to the validity determination process in step S603 described above, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

If it is confirmed in the validity confirmation process in step S2401 that the current pending information corresponds to the jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2402 and the process proceeds to step S2403. In step S2403, the jackpot type is confirmed with reference to the jackpot type table for the second operating port and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 acquired in step S212. The type confirmation process in step S2403 is similar to the type determination process in step S607 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After that, the process advances to step S2404, and a process is executed to store the jackpot information in the second pending command scheduled to be sent in step S214, and the present preliminary confirmation process ends.

Returning to the explanation of step S2402, if a negative determination is made in step S2402, that is, if the current hold information does not correspond to the jackpot result, the process advances to step S2405. If the current pending information corresponds to the special winning result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 and the process advances to step S2406. In step S2406, the special winning type is confirmed with reference to the special winning type table for the second operating port and the value of the special winning type counter C3 acquired in step S212. The type confirmation process in step S2406 is similar to the type determination process in step S613 described above, so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

After that, the process advances to step S2407, and the process of storing special winning information in the first pending command scheduled to be sent in step S212 is executed, and the present preliminary confirmation process ends.

If the pending information this time does not correspond to either the jackpot result or the special win result, that is, if it corresponds to a losing result, a negative determination is made in step S2405, and the present preliminary confirmation process is continued. finish.

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50, the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins in step S2202 will be described. In the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins, the reservation information stored in the second actuating mouth reservation area Rb is checked in the order of the first area → second area → third area → fourth area, and the number of consecutive wins is calculated based on the reservation information. Determine the number of times. The number of consecutive wins in this embodiment refers to the number of consecutive wins in a loop of the first special game state to the third special game state without transitioning to the normal game state.

<Continuous hit count calculation process>
In the continuous winning count calculation process, first, in step S2501, a hold to be determined is identified. That is, the determination target is limited to the reservation information stored in the second actuation port reservation area Rb at the timing when the continuous winning number calculation process is executed. Then, the number of reservation information stored in the second operation port reservation area Rb is set as a threshold value M, and "1" is set in the determination continuation counter provided in various counter areas of the RAM 244.

In the following step S2502, it is determined whether the value n of the determination continuation counter matches the threshold value M. If a negative determination is made in step S2502, the gaming state when the n-th gaming round is executed is specified in step S2503. In the following step S2504, the success or failure result of the n-th game is specified from the pending information. Thereafter, in step S2505, the gaming state when the (n+1)th gaming round is executed is specified. Then, in step S2506, the value n of the determination continuation counter is updated to n+1, and the process returns to step S2502. That is, when the main calculation process is started, the status and the validity result of the reservation information stored in the second operation port reservation area Rb are sequentially identified.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, that is, if the value n of the determination continuation counter matches the threshold value M, the process advances to step S2507. In step S2507, based on the identification results of steps S2503 to S2505, the transition of the gaming state after the hold is exhausted regarding the second operating port 34 is estimated. In the following step S2508, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated after the reservation is exhausted is specified. Thereafter, in step S2509, the number of consecutive wins is estimated based on the information specified and estimated in steps S2503 to S2508, and in step S2501, the determination continuation counter is cleared to "0", and this continuous winning number calculation process is ended.

It should be noted that in each game round related to the second operation port 34, a winning result is obtained approximately 1/3 of the time, and 100 times is set as the end standard number of times (time saving number of times) in the second special game state. In other words, although it is assumed that in the second special game state, there will almost certainly be a winning result before the end standard number of times is reached, although the probability is extremely low, all of the successive executions in the second special game state We cannot deny the possibility that the game result will be a loss. In consideration of such uncertain factors, each process of steps S2507 and S2509 in the continuous win count calculation process is defined as an "estimation" process. In other words, the calculation result in the continuous win count calculation process is an estimated value that includes estimation elements.

Hereinafter, an overview of calculating the number of consecutive wins will be explained with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. FIGS. 51 to 53 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between stored reservation information and the number of consecutive wins. In addition, in each of the examples shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, the game game being executed is the first game time when the normal game state shifts to the special game state, and the first operation opening holding area Ra is indicates a case where no reservation corresponding to the winning result is stored. Incidentally, in this embodiment, at the time of transition to the first special game state, the reservation corresponding to the winning result related to the first operation port 33 remains, and the reservation is preceded by the game round related to the second operation port 34. When executed, the above-mentioned estimation of the number of consecutive jackpots→notification is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 51, when performing the above calculation, all of the first to fourth areas of the second operation opening holding area Rb are filled, and the number of game rounds being executed (stored in the execution area AE) is A case is illustrated in which both the holding (holding) and the subsequent game round (holding stored in the holding area Rb for the second operation opening) correspond to the winning result. In this case, the game round being executed is in the first special game state, and at the start of the game round, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is three. If there is a winning result in the first special game state, the V prize will be used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the reference number of times to end the high-frequency support mode.

The winning result also corresponds to the first game round executed after the relevant game round. This game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. If a winning result is obtained under the high-frequency support mode, the second game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. The second game round also corresponds to the winning result. This game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. If the winning result occurs under the high frequency support mode, the number of consecutive wins will be the upper limit of 4, and the limiter will be activated. As a result, the third game round will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 51, the winning result also corresponds to the third game round, and since the winning result is in the third special game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode, the fourth game time is in the first special game state. It will be executed at Furthermore, the limiter is reset due to the winning result. The fourth game round also corresponds to the winning result, and by becoming a winning result in the first special game state compatible with high-frequency support mode, the subsequent game round will be the second special game compatible with high-frequency support mode. It will be executed in the state. At this point, the remaining number of hits until the limiter is activated is 2, so there are essentially 2 remaining hits. In this case, it is highly likely that two wins will occur in the fifth and subsequent game rounds in which no reservation has been acquired, and it is estimated that seven consecutive wins will occur, including the winnings in the corresponding game rounds that are currently being executed. In other words, since a hit is expected after the limiter is activated, it is estimated that consecutive hits exceeding the upper limit set by the limiter will occur.

In each example shown in FIG. 52, it is unclear whether a hit will occur after the limiter is activated. In other words, although it is highly likely that a win will continue until the limiter is activated, it is unclear whether a win will occur between the time the limiter activates and the transition to the normal gaming state.

Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 52(a), no reservation is stored in the second operation port reservation area Rb. In other words, the success or failure of the subsequent game round to be executed after the end of the corresponding game round is unknown. However, after the corresponding game round ends, the V winning is used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state, and there are still two winnings left until the limiter is activated. In other words, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is highly likely that two wins will occur during the second special game state. Based on these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the corresponding game round, the winnings will continue until the limiter is activated. In other words, the number of consecutive winnings including the corresponding game is estimated to be three.

In the example shown in FIG. 52(b), although a hold is stored in the first area of the second actuating port holding area Rb, this hold corresponds to a disconnected result. After the corresponding game round ends, the V winning is used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state, and there are still two winnings left until the limiter is activated. In other words, even if you win in the first game after the corresponding game, the second special game state will continue, and the remaining number of winnings until the end standard number of times is reached is 99, and the remaining number of winnings until the limiter activates is 2. ing. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is highly likely that two wins will occur during the second special game state. Based on these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the corresponding game round, the winnings will continue until the limiter is activated. In other words, the number of consecutive winnings including the corresponding game is estimated to be three.

In the example shown in FIG. 52(c), although holds are stored in the first to fourth areas of the second actuation port holding area Rb, all of these holds correspond to the result of being out. . After the corresponding game round ends, the V winning is used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state, and there are still two winnings left until the limiter is activated. In other words, even if you win in the 1st to 4th game after the corresponding game, the second special game state will continue, and the remaining number of winnings until reaching the end standard number of times is 96, and the remaining number of winnings until the limiter activates is 2. It has been times. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is highly likely that two wins will occur during the second special game state. Based on these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the corresponding game round, the winnings will continue until the limiter is activated. In other words, the number of consecutive winnings including the corresponding game is estimated to be three.

In the example shown in FIG. 52(d), reservations are stored in the first to fourth areas of the second operation port reservation area Rb, and the reservation in the third area corresponds to the winning result. After the corresponding game round ends, the V winning is used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state, and there are still two winnings left until the limiter is activated. After a losing result in the first and second gaming rounds, a winning result occurs in the third gaming round. As a result, the fourth game round will be executed in the second special game state in which the end reference number of times is reset to 100 times. The fourth game round corresponds to a losing result, and subsequent game rounds are executed under the second special game state. Here, in the fifth game, the remaining number of games until reaching the end reference number of times is 98, and the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is 1. Therefore, even if the subsequent hold is not acquired, it is highly likely that one win will occur during the second special game state. Based on these circumstances, it is estimated that after the end of the corresponding game round, the winnings will continue until the limiter is activated. In other words, the number of consecutive winnings including the corresponding game is estimated to be three.

In each example shown in FIG. 53, it is unclear whether a hit will occur after the limiter is activated. In other words, although it is highly likely that a win will continue until the limiter is activated, it is unclear whether a win will occur between the time the limiter activates and the transition to the normal gaming state.

In the example shown in FIG. 53(a), when performing the above calculation, all of the first to fourth areas of the second operation opening holding area Rb are filled, and the number of game rounds being executed (stored in the execution area AE) is 1st game run (on hold stored in the 1st area), 2nd game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area), 3rd game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area) If all of the game rounds (pending stored in the 3rd area) correspond to winning results, and the 4th gaming round (pending stored in the 4th area) corresponds to a winning result. Examples are given. In this case, the game round being executed is in the first special game state, and at the start of the game round, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is three. If there is a winning result in the first special game state, the V prize will be used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the reference number of times to end the high-frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. If a winning result is obtained under the high-frequency support mode, the second game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. The second game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. However, if a winning result occurs under the high-frequency support mode, the number of consecutive wins will be the upper limit of 4, and the limiter will be activated. As a result, the third game round will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 53(a), the third game round also corresponds to the winning result, and since the winning result is in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the fourth game round is the first one. This will be executed in a special game state. Furthermore, the limiter is reset due to the winning result. However, the fourth game round corresponds to a losing result and does not result in a winning result in the first special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. Thereafter, the game shifts to a third special game state compatible with the low-frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive winnings may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the reservations related to the fifth and subsequent game rounds have not yet been obtained. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive winnings including the relevant game is estimated to be four.

In the example shown in FIG. 53(b), when performing the above calculation, all of the first to fourth areas of the second actuation port holding area Rb are filled, and the number of game rounds being executed (stored in the execution area AE) is 1st game run (on hold stored in the 1st area), 2nd game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area), 4th game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area) If all of the game rounds (pending stored in the 3rd area) correspond to winning results, and the 3rd gaming round (pending stored in the 4th area) corresponds to a winning result. Examples are given. In this case, the game round being executed is in the first special game state, and at the start of the game round, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is three. If there is a winning result in the first special game state, the V prize will be used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the reference number of times to end the high-frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. If a winning result is obtained under the high-frequency support mode, the second game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. The second game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. However, if a winning result occurs under the high-frequency support mode, the number of consecutive wins will be the upper limit of 4, and the limiter will be activated. As a result, the third game round will be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode.

In the example of FIG. 53(b), the third game round corresponds to a winning result, and the fourth game round is the first This will be executed in a special game state. However, the fourth game round corresponds to the winning result, and the fifth game round will be executed in the first special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. The limiter will also be reset. In such a case, the number of consecutive winnings may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the reservations related to the fifth and subsequent game rounds have not yet been obtained. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive winnings including the relevant game is estimated to be four.

In the example shown in FIG. 53(c), when performing the above calculation, all of the first to fourth areas of the second operation opening holding area Rb are filled, and the number of game rounds being executed (stored in the execution area AE) is 1st game run (on hold stored in the 1st area), 3rd game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area), 4th game run (on hold stored in the 2nd area) If the game rounds (pending stored in the third area) all correspond to winning results, and the second gaming round (pending stored in the fourth area) corresponds to a winning result. Examples are given. In this case, the game round being executed is in the first special game state, and at the start of the game round, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is three. If there is a winning result in the first special game state, the V prize will be used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the reference number of times to end the high-frequency support mode.

The first game round also corresponds to the winning result, and this game round is executed under the high frequency support mode. If a winning result is obtained under the high-frequency support mode, the second game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. The second game round corresponds to a losing result, and the remaining number of times until reaching the end reference number of times is reduced by "1" and the game moves on to the third game round. In other words, the third game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. At this time, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated will also be carried over from the second game round to the third game round.

Although the third game round corresponds to the winning result, due to the limiter being activated, the fourth game round will be executed in the third special game state that supports the low frequency support mode. . Since the fourth game game corresponds to the winning result, the limiter is reset and the game shifts to the first special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive winnings may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the reservations related to the fifth and subsequent game rounds have not yet been obtained. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive winnings including the relevant game is estimated to be four.

In the example shown in FIG. 53(d), when performing the above calculation, all of the first to fourth areas of the second actuation port holding area Rb are filled, and the number of game rounds being executed (stored in the execution area AE) is the second game run (the hold stored in the first area), the third game time (the hold stored in the second area), the fourth game time (the hold stored in the second area), If all game rounds (pending stored in the third area) correspond to winning results, and the first gaming round (pending stored in the fourth area) corresponds to a winning result. Examples are given. In this case, the game round being executed is in the first special game state, and at the start of the game round, the remaining number of winnings until the limiter is activated is three. If there is a winning result in the first special game state, the V prize will be used as an opportunity to shift to the second special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode. In the second special game state, 100 times is set as the reference number of times to end the high-frequency support mode.

The first game round corresponds to a losing result, and this game round is executed under the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, the remaining number of times until reaching the end standard number of times is reduced by "1" and the game moves on to the second game time. In other words, the second game round is also executed under the high frequency support mode. The second game round corresponds to the winning result, and as a result of winning under the high frequency support mode, the third game round will also be executed in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. becomes. The 3rd game round corresponds to the winning result and is treated as a winning result under the high frequency support mode, but due to the limiter activation, the 4th game round corresponds to the 3rd special corresponding to the low frequency support mode. This will be executed in the gaming state.

The fourth game round corresponds to the winning result, the limiter is reset, and the game shifts to the first special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode. In such a case, the number of consecutive winnings may differ depending on whether or not the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34 results in a winning result. However, at the timing of performing the above calculation, the reservations related to the fifth and subsequent game rounds have not yet been obtained. Therefore, in such a case, the number of consecutive winnings including the relevant game is estimated to be four.

Next, the second half part processing that constitutes the challenge performance progress processing (see FIG. 45) will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 54.

<Processing for the second half>
In the second half part processing, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the second half part is in progress. If a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process for the second half of the main part is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process advances to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether the current game round is a game round corresponding to a losing result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process for the second half part is ended after executing the process for the missed result in step S2603. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2602, the winning result process is executed in step S2604, and then the second half part process is ended.

<Processing for missing results>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, in the process for losing results, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the third special effect mode is being introduced. If a negative determination is made in step S2701, the process for the missed result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2701, the process advances to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the introduction effect of the third special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2702, the process for the missed result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2702, the process advances to step S2703.

In step S2703, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit of four. That is, it is determined whether or not further pending acquisition is not possible. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, the process proceeds to step S2704, where a start process is executed to start the introduction effect A as an introduction effect to the third special effect mode, and then, in step S2705, a right-handed hit notification (large ) after executing the delayed start process, the process for the missed result ends. In the introduction effect A, the characters "RUSH" indicating a transition to the third special effect mode are dynamically displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 at the center of the display screen G. After the characters "RUSH" are displayed in a reduced size at the top of the display screen G, an image of a girl character holding a sign with a right arrow is dynamically displayed in the center of the display screen G. An indicator indicating the remaining time and a timer counter are displayed at the bottom of the screen (see FIG. 56).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the process advances to step S2706, and after executing a start process for starting introduction performance B as an introduction performance to the third special performance mode, the process for the winning result ends. In the introduction effect A, a seaside image is dynamically displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41. Note that, unlike introductory performance A, right-handed hitting notification is not performed.

Next, the process for winning results in step S2604 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

<Processing for winning results>
In the winning result processing, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the second special effect mode is being introduced. If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802. In step S2802, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion effect is being performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2802, the process advances to step S2803. In step S2803, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2803, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2803, the process for starting the winning number suggestion effect is executed in step S2804, and then the process for winning results is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2802, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2802, the process proceeds to step S2805, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the introduction performance of the second special performance mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the process for the final selection result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process for starting the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is executed in step S2806, and then the winning result process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2807. In step S2807, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the right-handed hit notification (large). If a negative determination is made in step S2807, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2807, the process for starting the right-handed hit notification (large) is executed in step S2808, and then the process for winning results is ended.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, an overview of the number-of-winnings suggestion effect and the right-handed hit notification will be explained. In the winning number suggestion effect, for example, if the calculation result (estimation result) of the number of consecutive wins is 3, the sequence will be as shown in Figure 58(a) → Figure 58(b) → Figure 58(c) → Figure 58(d) → The performance progresses in the order shown in FIG. 58(e). For example, if the calculation result (estimated result) of the number of consecutive wins is 7, then FIG. 58(a) → FIG. 58(b) → FIG. 58(c) → FIG. The presentation progresses in the order of 58(d)→FIG. 58(f)→FIG. 58(g)→FIG. 58(h).

In the first special performance mode (first special game state), a combination of "V" symbols is stopped and displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 when the winning result is announced. In the winning number suggestion performance, this "V" symbol is sequentially shifted to the stock number suggestion area provided on the right side of the display screen G. Due to this shift, the stock number display in the stock number suggestion area is updated (added) in the order of "Vx1" → "Vx2" → "Vx3". In this way, when all the "V" symbols that had been stopped and displayed have been shifted, the stock number display will become "V x 3", and the player will be informed that the number of consecutive wins will be 3 or more. It will be suggested.

As mentioned above, the actual number of consecutive wins will be greatly influenced by the remaining reservations. In line with this, in the winning number suggestion performance, the performance is structured to branch depending on the calculation result (estimated result) of the number of consecutive wins. Specifically, if the above calculation result is 3 times, the display of "V x 3" is not updated and the game goes through the winning game state and then goes to the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. Transition. On the other hand, if the above calculation result is 4 times or 7 times, the "V" symbol is redisplayed in the center of the display screen G, and the stock number display is also enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G. Ru. Then, by updating (adding) the stock number display, the number of consecutive wins is indicated to the player. Thereafter, after passing through the winning game state, the game moves to a second special game state corresponding to the continuous performance mode.

Here, when transitioning from the first special game state to the winning game state, after the winning number suggestion effect is executed in the second half, there is a right button to notify the player that they are in a situation where they should aim for a V prize. A notification is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59, an image of a girl holding a sign with a right arrow is dynamically displayed in the center of the display screen G, and an indicator indicating the remaining time is displayed at the bottom of the display screen G. Ru. Regarding the update speed (moving speed) of the current position in this indicator, the update speed matches that of the right hit notification (large) indicator when the winning result is a miss and prompts the winning to the second operating port 34. However, the update period of the indicator is shorter than the update period of the right-hand notification (large) when the result is a miss and prompts the player to enter the second operating port 34, so the overall length of the indicator is shorter. (See Figure 43). This is a contrivance to avoid the remaining time indicated by the indicator from being misunderstood by the player.

<Game flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, supplementary explanation will be given of the flow of the game. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when the game round in the first special game state corresponds to a winning result and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit before the winning/falsifying notification is made. It is a chart.

At the timing of ta1, the variable prize winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is transitioned to the ending. In the ending, the type of jackpot result that triggered the shift to the current jackpot gaming state is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. Thereafter, the notification ends at the timing of ta2, and the introduction performance for the challenge performance is executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state. At timing ta3 during this introduction performance (challenge performance introduction part), right hit notification (large) is started prior to transition to the first special game state.

At the subsequent timing ta4, the jackpot game state has ended and the state has shifted to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 changes from the closed state to the open state with high frequency. It will be switched. The challenge performance starts with the transition to the first special game state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until a prize is won in the second operating port 34. The standby part of the challenge performance is executed. The right-handed hit notification (large) will continue in this standby part as well.

After the transition to the first special game state, at timing ta5 when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the challenge performance shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as a trigger. In addition, upon winning the prize, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 60, even after the right-handed hit notification (large) ends at the timing ta5, the game ball continues to be ejected, so that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is increased at the timing ta6. has reached the upper limit (4).

At timing ta7 while the challenge performance is in progress, the player is informed of the success or failure result of the relevant game round. In other words, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43. Thereafter, at timing ta8, the number of consecutive wins (number of wins) including the winning result in the current game round is suggested to the player.

At the subsequent timing of ta9, the right hit notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the special winning game state, and the player is urged to win a V prize. Thereafter, at the timing ta10, the final display of the symbol on the actuating opening display section 43 is started, and at the timing ta11 when the game round ends, the gaming state has shifted from the first special game state to the special winning game state. Then, based on the fact that the V win occurred at the timing of ta12, the special winning game state is shifted to the V jackpot game state at the timing of ta13.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 61, it is confirmed that the game round in the first special game state corresponds to the winning result, and the hold related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit before the win/fail notification. A supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the game in this case.

At timing tb1, the first variable prize winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is transitioned to the ending. In the ending, the player is informed of the type of jackpot result that triggered the shift to the current jackpot gaming state in the result notification part. Thereafter, the result notification ends at the timing tb2, and the introduction performance of the challenge performance is executed in the first special game state which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state. At timing tb3 during this challenge performance introduction part, right hit notification (large) is started prior to transition to the first special game state.

At the subsequent timing tb4, the jackpot game state has ended and the game has shifted to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 changes from the closed state to the open state with high frequency. It will be switched. The challenge performance starts with the transition to the first special game state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not stored, so until a prize is won in the second operating port 34. The standby part of the challenge performance is executed. The right-handed hit notification (large) will continue in this standby part as well.

After the transition to the first special game state, at timing tb5 when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the challenge performance shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as a trigger. In addition, upon winning the prize, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 61, even after the right hit notification (large) ends at timing tb5, the game ball continues to be ejected, so that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is increased at timing tb6. has reached the upper limit (4).

At timing tb7 while the challenge performance is in progress, the player is notified of the success or failure result of the game round. In other words, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the corresponding game round corresponds to a losing result, and at timing tb7, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a losing result. After the miss result is clearly shown to the player, the right hit notification (small) is canceled.
Thereafter, at the timing tb8, the symbol corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed on the second operating port display section BS, and at the timing tb9 after the confirmation display ends, the state shifts to the third special game state. In the third special game state, the remaining reservation related to the second operating port 34 will be extinguished.

After that, the game shifts to the third special game state at the timing tb9, and in the third special game state, the remaining reservation related to the second operating port 34 is extinguished.

Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 62, it is confirmed that the game round in the first special game state corresponds to a winning result, and the hold related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit before the win/fail notification. A supplementary explanation will be given regarding the flow of the game in this case.

At timing tc1, the first variable prize winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is transitioned to the ending. In the ending, the player is informed of the type of jackpot result that triggered the shift to the current jackpot gaming state in the result notification part. After that, the result notification ends at the timing tc2, and the introduction performance of the challenge performance is executed in the first special game state which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state. At timing tc3 during this challenge performance introduction part, right hit notification (large) is started prior to transition to the first special game state.

At the subsequent timing tc4, the jackpot game state ends and the game shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 changes from the closed state to the open state with high frequency. It will be switched. The challenge performance starts with the transition to the first special game state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not stored, so until a prize is won in the second operating port 34. The standby part of the challenge performance is executed. The right-handed hit notification (large) will continue in this standby part as well.

After the transition to the first special game state, at timing tc5 when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the challenge performance shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as a trigger. In addition, upon winning the prize, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small). In the example shown in FIG. 62, the firing of game balls is stopped after the right-handed hit notification (large) ends at timing tc5, and the number of balls held at the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit (4 balls). It becomes.

At timing tc6 while the challenge performance is in progress, the player is informed of the success or failure result of the game round. In other words, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the corresponding game round corresponds to a losing result, and the fact that the result is a losing result is clearly shown to the player.

At timing tc7 after the result notification, the right-handed hit notification (small) is switched to the right-handed hit notification (large). This prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right route. At timing tc8, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit, and this is the trigger for the right-hand hit notification (large) to end. Thereafter, at the timing of tc9, the symbol corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed on the second operating port display section BS, and at the timing of tc10 after the completion of the confirmation display, the state shifts to the third special game state. In the third special game state, the remaining reservation related to the second operating port 34 will be extinguished.

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

In the configuration shown in the first embodiment, by shifting to the first special game state compatible with the high-frequency support mode, it becomes easier to enter the second operating port 34, and it becomes easier to accumulate pending information. Here, there is a difference in value between the pending information that triggered the start of a game round in the first special gaming state and the pending information that was acquired during that gaming round and carried over to the third special gaming state that supports the low-frequency support mode. do. In other words, the bonus (time saving) that is given to the player depends on whether the winning result in the game round during the third special game state becomes a V-win or the winning result in a game round during the first special game state becomes a V-win. There will be a difference in the number of times). In other words, after transitioning to the third special game state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the second operating port 34, and the game rotation is substantially limited to the pending information stored during the first special game state. will proceed. Here, if the value of the pending information acquired by entering the starting ball into the starting ball entry section after the transition to the first special game state changes depending on the change in the situation in which the game round related to the pending information is executed, , it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to increasing the level of attention to the game.

As shown in this embodiment, if the configuration is such that the end reference number of special game states corresponding to the high-frequency support mode is different, the winning result during the third special game state is determined based on the pending information acquired during the special game state. If this happens, the game will move to the first special game state again, and it will be possible to try again to win in the first special game state. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

In addition, if the player is given preferential benefits (number of time reductions) when a winning result is achieved in the game round in the first special game state, the tension in the game round can be increased. . In addition, even if there is no winning result in the relevant game round, the player can try again to obtain the smaller award based on the special information that has already been obtained, and the player can It is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that rapidly reduces the desire to play.

In the configuration shown in this embodiment, in a game round (predetermined game round) in the first special game state, if the lottery result in the predetermined game round is a winning result, the stored subsequent pending information is a hit. It is specified how many pieces of pending information corresponding to the result are included, and the number of consecutive wins is suggested based on the specified result during the predetermined game round. In other words, if there is a winning result in a predetermined game, it is also suggested how many more winning results are waiting, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that goes beyond simply winning. be able to. By making such novel suggestions, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

More specifically, in the predetermined game round, if the lottery result in the predetermined game round is a winning result, the subsequent stored hold information is referred to and the game related to each stored hold information is played. The number of winning results is estimated in a plurality of game times including the game time and the game time related to pending information that has not yet been stored. Then, this estimation result will be announced in the predetermined game round. With such a configuration, if a winning result is achieved in a predetermined game, it will also notify you of how many more winning results are waiting for you, so that you will be more satisfied than just a winning result. It is possible to give a feeling to the player. Since the number of pending information exceeding the storage limit may be notified, the impact when the notification is made is extremely large. This is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Note that by configuring the estimated results notified during a predetermined game round to include the winning results in the predetermined game rounds, the impact and appearance of the notified estimated results can be suitably improved.

In order to notify the above-mentioned estimation results (indicating the number of consecutive wins), if the number of stored hold information decreases, it is necessary to estimate how the branching of the gaming state will proceed, etc. This means that there will be fewer guesses involved, and there are concerns that the reliability of notifications will be lowered, and the impact of notifications will be weakened as the number of winning results reported is underestimated. In view of these circumstances, a configuration in which estimation or notification of estimation results is avoided when the number of stored hold information has not reached the standard number (for example, the upper limit of storage number) would avoid the above-mentioned disadvantages. There is a technical significance in that it can suppress the occurrence.

As described above, it is preferable to increase the number of stored pending information as much as possible in order to increase the impact and reliability of the estimation results to be broadcast. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the configuration is such that the shooting of the game ball toward the second operating port 34 is suggested before estimation, the number of pending information that can be referenced at the time of estimation can be increased.

In addition, in a predetermined game round, by suggesting the number of consecutive wins using the "V" symbol used to notify the winning result, a correlation is created between the notification of the winning result and the suggestion of the number of consecutive winnings, It is possible to create an integrated performance.

If the predetermined game round (last game round) in the first special game state corresponds to a winning result, the form of the performance for the winning result will differ depending on the number of stored hold information. In this way, by configuring the performance mode of a predetermined game round in the first special game state to change depending on the state of entry of the ball into the second operating port 34 in the first special game state, the degree of attention to the predetermined game round can be increased. can contribute to the improvement of

In the first special game state, the support mode corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and the ball entering the second operating port 34 is facilitated. In such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid a situation where the function of changing the performance mode depending on whether or not the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit is not properly exhibited.

As shown in this embodiment, in the case where the performance is composed of two parts, the first half and the second half, for a predetermined game round, pending information stores the performance mode of the performance for the losing result in the second half after the notification of the win/fail result. By having a configuration that differs depending on the number of results, it is possible to suitably suppress the performance from becoming monotonous even after the notification of the result of failure.

When shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state, it is configured such that the more pending information carried over from the first special game state to the third special game state, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. In such a configuration, after being notified of a losing result, the game can be advantageously advanced by increasing the number of pending information to the upper limit before the end of the game round. Therefore, in the latter half of the above-mentioned performance, a practically preferable configuration is adopted in which the display of an image that suggests to the player that the game ball is to be fired toward the second operating port 34 is included to suppress the disadvantage to the player. realizable.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment described above, if the game round executed in the first special game state corresponds to a winning result, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 at the time when the win/fail result is notified. It is configured to determine whether or not the number has reached the upper limit, and if it is insufficient, execute the right-hand hit notification (large), but the timing of checking the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 and the right-hand hit notification are The timing to start (large) is arbitrary. For example, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is confirmed at a predetermined timing after the notification of success or failure. Even in this case, after the first special game state ends, it becomes difficult to obtain a new hold related to the second operating port 34. Therefore, it is preferable to start the right hit notification (large) before the end of the first special game state.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, when transitioning from the jackpot game state to the first special game state, the right-hand hit notification (large) is started during the ending of the jackpot game state, and the right-hand hit notification (large) Although the configuration is such that the game continues over the jackpot game state and the first special game state, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the right hit notification (large) is disclosed at the time of transition to the first special gaming state or after the transition.

<Modification 3>
In the above-described first embodiment, an image for notifying a right-hand hit that is executed when aiming at the second variable prize winning device 32B of the right route for the purpose of winning a V prize, and a second operation of the right route for the purpose of obtaining a reservation. Although the image is different from the right-handed notification image that is executed when you should aim for the mouth 34, the right-handed notification image that is executed when you should aim for the second variable winning device 32B of the right route for the purpose of winning a V prize. It is also possible to make the image for right-handed hitting and the image for right-handed hitting notification, which is executed when aiming at the second operation port 34 of the right route for the purpose of holding reservation acquisition, to be the same.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the right hit notification (large) executed at the beginning of the first special game state is canceled when at least one hold related to the second operating port 34 is acquired. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The right hit notification (large) executed at the beginning of the first special game state may be configured to be canceled when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the configuration is such that the right-handed player notification (small) and the right-handed player notification (large) are switched, but the execution period of the right-handed player notification (small) and the execution period of the right-handed player notification (large) are different. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the numbers overlap. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which right-handed hitting notification (large) is executed during right-handed hitting notification (small).

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment described above, the right-handed hit notification (small) is configured to continue even in the main part of the challenge performance, but the right-handed hit notification (small) is It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process is terminated.

<Modification 7>
In the first embodiment described above, by setting the variable display mode in the third special game state to the first variable display mode, although there is a difference in the main game progress target, the third special game state = normal Although the game state is described, the present invention is not limited to this. In order to enhance the specialness of the third special game state, the variable display mode in the third special game state is set to a third variable display mode different from the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode, and the third special game state is It is also possible to have a configuration that completely differentiates the normal gaming state.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, in the first special performance mode in the first special game state, the period from the start of the main part to the timing at which the winning/failure result is notified on the symbol display device 41, and the timing of the notification When comparing the period from the time to the end of the game round, the latter is configured to be longer than the former, but the present invention is not limited to this. When comparing the period from the start of the main part to the timing when the winning/failing result is notified on the symbol display device 41 and the period from the timing of the notification until the end of the game round, the former is better than the latter. It may be configured so that it is long, or it may be configured so that both have the same length.

In addition, in the first special performance mode in the first special game state, the period from the start of the main part to the timing when the winning/failing result is notified on the symbol display device 41, and the period from the timing of the notification to the timing when the winning/failing result is notified on the operating opening display section 43. When comparing the period until the picture is stopped and displayed (determined display), the latter is configured to be longer than the former, but the present invention is not limited to this. The period from the start of the main part to the timing when the result is notified on the symbol display device 41, and the period from the timing of the notification until the symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the actuation opening display section 43. When compared, the former may be longer than the latter, or both may be of the same length.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is set to 4, but the upper limit may be changed arbitrarily.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, the upper limit of the number of consecutive hits by the limiter (4 times) and the upper limit of the number of reservations (4 pieces) related to the second operating port 34 are set to be the same number, but it is also possible to make them different. It is. However, in estimating the number of consecutive wins exceeding the upper limit of the number of reservations, it is preferable to be able to specify the flow from limiter activation to winning within the four subsequent reservations. The upper limit of the number of consecutive hits by the limiter is preferably set to a smaller number than the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34. When such a change is made, it is more preferable to make such a change that the limiter does not operate multiple times within the four subsequent holds.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment described above, in the first special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the reference number of ends of the game round related to the second operating port 34 is set to "1"; may be changed arbitrarily. For example, in the first special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, the reference number of game ends related to the second operation port 34 may be set to "2" times, or may be set to "3" times or more.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, in the first special game state or second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the winning result is higher than in the case where a special winning result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode. The configuration was such that cases with special winning results were given preferential treatment so that the set end standard number of times was higher, but this has been changed and the first special game state and second special game state compatible with high frequency support mode have been changed. The configuration may be such that preferential treatment is given so that the end standard number of times set is higher when a special winning result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode than when a special winning result is obtained in the low-frequency support mode. It is possible.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment described above, when a special winning result occurs during the high-frequency support mode, preferential treatment is given to the player so as to be more advantageous than when a special winning result occurs during the low-frequency support mode. However, if a special winning result occurs during the low-frequency support mode, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the player so that it is more advantageous than when a special winning result occurs during the high-frequency support mode.

<Modification 13>
In the first embodiment described above, there is a difference in the support mode that is set thereafter depending on whether a special winning result occurs during the high-frequency support mode or when a special winning result occurs during the low-frequency support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, the variable display mode that determines the variable display time on the display section for the operating port includes a normal mode (first mode) and a time saving mode (second mode) in which the variable display time is shortened than the normal mode. It is also possible to create a configuration in which the subsequent support mode is set differently depending on whether a special winning result occurs during the normal mode or a special winning result during the time saving mode. .

<Modification 14>
In the first embodiment described above, the number of consecutive wins is calculated and suggested only when the game times executed during the first special game state correspond to a winning result, but instead of this, Alternatively, in addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of consecutive wins is calculated and then suggested when the game times executed during the first special game state correspond to a losing result.

In this way, if the configuration is such that calculation → suggestion is performed in the case of a negative result, the above-mentioned method is limited to the case where it is possible to return from the third special game state to the second special game state due to the subsequent suspension of the obtained result. Calculation → Suggestion should be differentiated from calculation → suggestion when the result is a winning result.

Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the start timing of the suggestion is different in the case of a losing result and in the case of a winning result. In this case, it is preferable to set a difference so that the start timing of the suggestion in the case of a losing result is earlier than the start timing of the suggestion in the case of a winning result.

Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the execution period of the suggestion is different between the case of a losing result and the case of a winning result. In this case, it is preferable to set a difference so that the execution period of the suggestion in the case of a losing result is longer than the execution period of the suggestion in the case of a winning result.

<Modification 15>
In the first embodiment described above, during the first special game state, the number of consecutive wins is suggested after the special winning result is announced, but it is also possible to make the notification and the suggestion at the same time. be.

<Modification 16>
In the first embodiment described above, in the first special game state, a display effect for suggesting the number of consecutive wins is executed using the "V" symbol used when notifying the special winning result. The display effect for suggesting the number of consecutive wins may be arbitrarily changed as long as it can suggest the number of consecutive wins.

<Modification 17>
As an execution condition for suggesting the number of consecutive wins in the first special game state, it may be added that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached a predetermined number. This predetermined number may be the upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34, or may be a number smaller than the upper limit.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the calculation of the number of consecutive wins may not be performed if the number of reservations has not reached a predetermined number, or the calculation of the number of consecutive wins may not be performed if the number of reservations has not reached a predetermined number. may be configured such that the number of consecutive wins is calculated but the number of consecutive wins is not suggested.

<Modification 18>
The suggested content of the number of consecutive wins started in the first special game state may be updated as the game progresses. For example, if the number of consecutive wins is suggested and the game returns to the first special game state via another gaming state, the content of the suggestion is updated based on the number of consecutive wins calculated in the first special game state. It's good to do that.

<Modification 19>
In the first embodiment described above, when estimating the number of consecutive wins during the first special game state, the win/fail result and the transition game state for each hold are sequentially specified, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. Although the amount of stored data is large, the relationship between the obtained hold status and the number of consecutive wins is mapped and stored in advance, and the number of consecutive wins is estimated by comparing the relationship with the actual hold status. It is also possible to do this.

<Modification 20>
In the first embodiment, the reservation information referred to when calculating the number of consecutive wins during the first special game state is limited to the reservation information related to the second operating port 34, but this has been changed and the It is also possible that the reservation information referred to when calculating the number of consecutive wins during the special game state is the reservation information related to the second operating port 34 and the pending information related to the first operating port 33.

<Second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when transitioning to the first special game state, a notification (right-handed notification (large)) urging winning to the second operating port 34 is sent at the beginning of the first special game state. After executing the game and notifying the win/fail result of the game, the number of consecutive wins is calculated (estimated) based on the remaining hold related to the second operating port 34. In this embodiment, although the basic flow of the game is the same as that in the first embodiment, the configuration related to the right-handed hit notification, specifically, is executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82. A part of the challenge performance progressing process (processing for winning results) is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63, the winning result processing in this embodiment will be described.

<Processing for winning results>
In the winning result process, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the second special effect mode is being introduced. If a negative determination is made in step S2901, the process advances to step S2902. In step S2902, it is determined whether or not the winning number suggestion effect is being performed. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether right-handed hit notification (medium) is being executed.

Here, the right-handed hit notification (middle) will be explained with reference to FIG. 64. As shown in FIG. 64(b), for right-handed hitting notification (medium), the area occupied by the image for right-handed hitting notification on display screen G is larger than for right-handed hitting notification (small) (see FIG. 64(a)). Moreover, it is smaller than the right-handed notification (large). In the right-handed notification (middle), there is an arrow detouring from the top to the right side of the combination of "V" symbols displayed in the center of the display screen G, the word "CHARGE", and information indicating the pending acquisition status. , and an indicator that shows the remaining time. In other words, the display is configured to be as large as possible without interfering with the display of the winning results. Note that the sound output from the speaker unit 64 during the right-handed hitting notification (medium) is the right-handed hitting notification (large), and more specifically, the right-handed hitting notification (large) that is executed when the situation is such that the second operating port 34 should be aimed. ), and its volume is also set to be the same as the right-handed hit notification (loud).

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, the process advances to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether it is the timing to start right-handed hitting notification (middle). Specifically, it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the success/failure result was announced in the first half. This predetermined period is a period during which it is explained to the player that a performance suggesting the number of consecutive wins (a performance suggesting the number of wins) will occur.

If a negative determination is made in step S2904, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. When a negative determination is made in step S2905, the process advances to step S2906, and after executing the start process of the right-handed hit notification (medium), the process for hitting the winning result ends. In the start process of step S2906, an execution period of the right hit notification (medium), in other words, a grace period until the calculation of the number of consecutive hits is set. That is, in the present embodiment, a grace period is ensured so that the timing for calculating the number of consecutive wins is not the timing of the notification of success or failure, but a timing later than the timing of the notification of success or failure. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2905, a process for starting a winning number suggestion effect is executed in step S2907, and then the process for winning results is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2903, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2903, that is, if right-handed hit notification (medium) is being executed, the process advances to step S2908. In step S2908, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, the end process of the right hit notification (medium) is executed in step S2909, and the start process of the winning number suggestion effect is executed in the subsequent step S2907, and then Finish the process.

Returning to the explanation of step S2908, if a negative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S2910. In step S2910, it is determined whether the set period for right-handed hit notification (medium) has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S2910, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2910, each process in steps S2909 and S2907 is executed, and then the process for winning results is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2902, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, if the winning number suggestion effect is being executed, the process advances to step S2911. In step S2911, it is determined whether it is time to start the introduction effect of the second special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S2911, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2911, the process advances to step S2912, and after executing the introduction effect start process of the second special effect mode, the winning result process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S2901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, that is, if the introduction effect of the second special effect mode is in progress, the process advances to step S2913. In step S2913, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the right-handed hit notification (large). If a negative determination is made in step S2913, the process for the hit result is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2913, the process for starting the right-handed hit notification (large) is executed in step S2914, and then the process for winning results is ended.

<Game flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, supplementary explanation will be given of the flow of the game. FIG. 65 shows a case where the game times in the first special game state correspond to a winning result, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit by the time the right hit notification (medium) starts. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

At timing td1, the first variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is transitioned to the ending. In the ending, the type of jackpot result that triggered the shift to the current jackpot gaming state is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. After that, the notification ends at the timing td2, and the introduction performance for the challenge performance is started in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state. At timing td3 during this introduction performance (challenge performance introduction part), a right hit notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special game state.

At the subsequent timing td4, the jackpot game state ends and the state shifts to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 changes from the closed state to the open state with high frequency. It will be switched. The challenge performance starts with the transition to the first special game state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until a prize is won in the second operating port 34. The standby part of the challenge performance is executed. The right-handed hit notification (large) will continue in this standby part as well.

After the transition to the first special game state, at timing td5 when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the challenge performance shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as a trigger. In addition, upon winning the prize, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small). In the example shown in FIG. 65, the game ball firing operation is stopped before the number of balls held at the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit (four), and the number of balls held at the second operating port 34 is The game is progressing without reaching the upper limit.

At timing td6 while the challenge performance is in progress, the player is informed (clearly) of the success or failure result of the game round. In other words, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43. At timing td7, when a predetermined period has elapsed from timing td6, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit, and right-handed hitting notification (middle) is started at this timing. At the subsequent timing of td8, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. Taking this as an opportunity, the right-handed hit notification (middle) is canceled and a presentation suggesting the number of consecutive hits is started.

It should be noted that the timing at which the number of reservations reaches the upper limit due to winnings in the second operating port 34 depends on the player's operations, etc., and a certain degree of variation may occur. Therefore, if the interval period until the subsequent right-handed hit notification (large) is shorter than the standard period, the right-handed hit notification (medium) will switch to the right-handed hit notification (small), but the interval period will be shorter than the standard period. If the ball is too long, the system is configured to switch from right-handed hitting notification (middle) to no right-handed hitting notification. This prevents the player from being disadvantaged due to not performing the firing operation, and also avoids the possibility that the switching of operation suggestions in excessive detail may cause discomfort to the player. This is a device to do so.

At the timing td9 when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the number of consecutive hits is suggested. Thereafter, at timing 10 at t, the right hit notification (large) is switched to, and at timing td11, the symbol corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed (determined display) on the actuating opening display section 43. At timing td12 after the confirmed display period has elapsed, the challenge performance ends and the game state shifts from the first special game state to the special winning game state. Then, based on the fact that the V win occurred at the timing of td13, the special winning game state is shifted to the V jackpot game state at the timing of td14.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the right-hand hit notification (large) is configured to end based on the acquisition of one hold related to the second operating port 34 after transition to the first special game state. It is not limited to this. It is sufficient if the right-handed notification (large) can be terminated before the number of acquired holds reaches the upper limit, for example, there are two holds related to the second operating port 34 after transition to the first special game state. The configuration may be such that the right-hand hit notification (large) is terminated based on the acquisition, or the right-hand hit notification is terminated based on the acquisition of three holds related to the second operating port 34 after transition to the first special game state. (Large) may be configured to be terminated, or the right-hand hit notification (Large) may be configured to be terminated based on the acquisition of four holds related to the second operating port 34 after transition to the first special game state. It is also possible.

Further, it is also possible to configure such a configuration that the right hit notification (large) is terminated after a predetermined period of time after one hold related to the second operating port 34 is obtained after the transition to the first special game state.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, in the game round executed after transition to the first special game state, right-handed hitting notification (large) is executed as right-handed hitting notification in the first half part, and right-handed hitting notification (large) is executed as right-handed hitting notification in the second half part. It was configured to execute right-handed hit notification (medium). In other words, although the configuration is such that the right-handed hitting notification in the first half part is emphasized more conspicuously than the right-handed hitting notification in the second half part, the present invention is not limited to this.

The right-handed hitting notification in the first half and the right-handed hitting notification in the second half may be the same, or the right-handed hitting notification in the second half may be emphasized more conspicuously than the right-handed hitting notification in the first half.

<Modification 3>
If at least one piece of pending information related to the second operating port 34 is stored before the transition to the first special game state, the first right-handed game executed from the jackpot game state to the first special game state It is also possible to configure a configuration in which the notification (large) is not executed (cancelled).

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, after the start of the right-handed hit notification (large) at the beginning of the main part, if a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the right-handed hit notification (large) is configured to end. However, at this time, it may be configured to display a message (for example, "Complete") indicating that a winning has occurred in the second operating port 34.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, the right-handed hit notification (small) is executed between the right-handed hit notification (large) in the first half (beginning) of the main part and the right-handed hit notification (medium) in the second half of the main part. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the right-handed hit notification (small) is not performed.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment, the right-handed hit notification (small) is executed between the right-handed hit notification (large) in the first half (beginning) of the main part and the right-handed hit notification (medium) in the second half of the main part. However, during the period when this right-handed hit notification (small) is being executed, if a game ball fired to the right route enters the ball entry area such as the through gate 35, the current performance will be affected. It is also possible to have a configuration that changes (for example, steps up) based on the pitch.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment, a certain interval (predetermined period) is provided from when the number of winnings is announced in the main part until the right-handed notification starts, but this interval will be omitted. It is also possible.

<Modification 8>
In the second embodiment, even if the execution period of the right hit notification (medium) has elapsed without the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaching the upper limit, consecutive hits from the acquired reservations are possible. Although the configuration is such that the number of times is calculated, the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of reservations has not reached the upper limit at the timing when the execution period of right hit notification (medium) has elapsed, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of consecutive hits is not calculated. Even in this case, it is preferable to perform the winning number notification effect by keeping the display to "V x 3".

<Modification 9>
In the second embodiment, the right-handed hit notification (middle) is executed in the second right-handed hit notification during the main part, but the invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which right-handed hit notification (large) is executed instead of right-handed hit notification (medium).

<Third embodiment>
In the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the number of consecutive wins is suggested during the game round executed in the first special game state. This embodiment is different from the above-described embodiments in terms of the structure related to suggesting the number of consecutive wins. Specifically, the suggestion of the number of consecutive wins is carried out during the V jackpot gaming state that transitions from the first special gaming state through the special winning gaming state, or during the jackpot gaming state that directly transitions from the first special gaming state. A part of the first special performance mode processing (challenge performance progress process and challenge performance end process) executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 has been changed. Hereinafter, each of these processes will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 66 and 67, focusing on the differences from each process in the first embodiment.

<Challenge production progress process>
In the challenge performance proceeding process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether the symbol display device 41 is notifying the result of winning or not, that is, whether or not the "V" symbol combination is being stopped and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S3001, the process advances to step S3002. In step S3002, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to notify the winning/failing result on the symbol display device 41. If a negative determination is made in step S3002, the main challenge performance progressing process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the process advances to step S3003.

In step S3003, it is determined whether the game round corresponds to a winning result. If it corresponds to the winning result, an affirmative determination is made in step S3003 and the process proceeds to step S3004, where a winning result corresponding performance start process is executed, and then the main challenge performance proceeding process is ended. In the performance corresponding to the winning result, an image to the effect that the fairy has been captured is displayed on the display screen G, and the combination of "V" symbols is stopped and displayed, clearly indicating to the player that the challenge performance has been successful.

On the other hand, if it corresponds to a losing result, a negative determination is made in step S3003, the process proceeds to step S3005, and after executing a performance start process corresponding to a negative result, the main challenge performance proceeding process is ended. In the performance corresponding to the missed result, an image to the effect that the fairy has been missed is displayed on the display screen G, and the "unfortunate" symbol is stopped and displayed, clearly indicating to the player that the challenge performance has failed.

Returning to the explanation of step S3001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3001, the process advances to step S3006. In step S3006, it is determined whether it is the timing to complete notification of the success or failure result. If a negative determination is made in step S3006, the main challenge performance progressing process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3006, it is determined in step S3007 whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S3007, the main challenge performance progressing process is directly ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3007, a right-handed hit notification (medium) or right-handed hit notification (large) start process is executed in step S3008, and the present challenge performance progress process is ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the challenge performance end process will be described.

<Challenge production end process>
In the challenge effect end process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the game round related to the challenge effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start displaying the final pattern on the operating port display section 43. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the main challenge performance end process is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3101, the process advances to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a winning result. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the main challenge performance end process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3102, the process advances to step S3103.

In step S3103, it is determined whether the subsequent hold for the second operating port 34 is secured. If a negative determination is made in step S3103, the main challenge performance end process is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the process advances to step S3104. In step S3104, a process of calculating the number of consecutive wins is executed. This process is the same as the process for calculating the number of consecutive wins shown in the first embodiment (see FIG. 50), so a description thereof will be omitted, but the calculation result is stored and held in the RAM 244. Thereafter, in step S3105, a winning number suggestion flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and the present challenge performance end process is ended.

Next, the jackpot game state processing executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 as part of the regular processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 68.

<Processing for jackpot game state>
In the process for the jackpot game state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the performance for the jackpot game state is being executed. The performance for the jackpot game state is a video that is displayed during the jackpot game state, and on the display screen G, in addition to the video, the number of rounds being executed, the number of prize balls acquired, etc. are displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S3201, the process advances to step S3202. In step S3202, it is determined whether an opening command for a jackpot has been received from the main control device 81. If a negative determination is made in step S3202, the process for the main jackpot game state is directly ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, the process for starting the performance for the jackpot game state is executed in step S3202, and then the process for the main jackpot game state is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S3201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, that is, if the performance for the jackpot game state is being executed, the process advances to step S3240. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not a winning number suggesting performance is being executed in such a way as to interrupt a series of basic performances. If a negative determination is made in step S3204, the process advances to step S3205. In step S3205, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3205, the main jackpot game state processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3205, the process advances to step S3206. In step S3206, it is determined whether the winning number suggestion flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S3206, the main jackpot game state processing is immediately ended. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, the process for starting the winning number suggestion performance is executed in step S3207, and then the process for the main jackpot game state is ended. The winning number suggestion effect is the same as that in the first embodiment (see FIG. 58, etc.), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Returning to the explanation of step S3204, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, the process advances to step S3208. In step S3208, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the winning number suggestion effect. If a negative determination is made in step S3208, the main jackpot game state processing is immediately ended. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, the process advances to step S3209. In step S3209, winning number suggestion effect ending processing is executed. As a result, the performance for the jackpot game state returns from the number-of-winnings suggestion performance to the above-mentioned basic performance. However, even in this case, the suggested content continues to be displayed on the display screen G. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3210, where the winning number suggestion flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased, and the process for the main jackpot game state is ended.

<Game flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the flow of suggesting the winning number in this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 69 shows a case where the game times in the first special game state correspond to a winning result, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit by the time the right hit notification (large) starts. It is a timing chart showing the flow of the game.

At the timing te1, the first variable winning device 32A switches from the open state to the closed state, and the round game is transitioned to the ending. In the ending, the type of jackpot result that triggered the shift to the current jackpot gaming state is notified (clarified) to the player in the result notification part. Thereafter, at the timing of te2, the notification ends, and an introductory performance for the challenge performance to be executed in the first special game state, which is the transition destination from the jackpot game state, is started. At the timing of te3 during this introduction performance (challenge performance introduction part), the right hit notification (large) is started prior to the transition to the first special game state.

At the subsequent timing te4, the jackpot game state has ended and the game has shifted to the first special game state. The first special game state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, and when the game ball enters the through gate 35 arranged on the right route, the second operating port 34 changes from the closed state to the open state with high frequency. It will be switched. The challenge performance starts with the transition to the first special game state, but at this point, the hold related to the second operating port 34 is not secured, so until a prize is won in the second operating port 34. The standby part of the challenge performance is executed. The right-handed hit notification (large) will continue in this standby part as well.

After the transition to the first special game state, at timing te5 when a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, the challenge performance shifts from the standby part to the main part with the winning as a trigger. In addition, upon winning the prize, the right-handed notification (large) is switched to the right-handed notification (small). In the example shown in FIG. 69, the game ball firing operation is stopped before the number of balls held at the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit (four balls), and the number of balls held at the second operating port 34 is The game is progressing without reaching the upper limit.

At timing te6 while the challenge performance is in progress, the player is informed (clearly) of the success or failure result of the game round. In other words, the result is clearly displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41 prior to the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43. At timing te7, when a predetermined period has elapsed from timing te6, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is less than the upper limit, and right-handed hitting notification (middle) is started at this timing. At the subsequent timing te8, a prize is won to the second operating port 34, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. Here, in this embodiment, the right-handed hit notification (medium) is continued even after the number of reservations reaches the upper limit. Specifically, the state shifts to a special winning game state and continues until a V win occurs. With such a configuration, the mode of the right hit notification is finely switched, thereby suppressing the impression that it is bothersome to the player.

Thereafter, at the timing te10, the final display of the symbol on the operating port display section 43 is started, and the number of consecutive wins is calculated based on the hold related to the second operating port 34 stored at this timing. Thereafter, at the timing te11 when the game round ends, the first special game state shifts to the special winning game state. When the second variable winning device 32B becomes open and a V winning occurs, after the special winning gaming state ends, the state shifts to the V jackpot gaming state. At the timing te14 when the second round in the V jackpot game state starts, the winning number suggestion performance is started, and at the subsequent timing te15, the number of consecutive wins is suggested to the player.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive wins is calculated when the symbol is displayed in a stopped state (determined display) on the operating port display section 43. That is, the number of consecutive wins is calculated before the support mode switches from the low-frequency support mode to the high-frequency support mode. It is also possible to change this to calculate the number of consecutive wins after switching to the low frequency support mode. For example, it is possible to have a configuration in which the number of consecutive wins is calculated during the special winning game state, or a configuration in which the number of consecutive wins is calculated during the jackpot game state.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive wins is calculated in the game rounds executed during the first special game state, but the invention is not limited to this. <Modification 4>
In the third embodiment, when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit in the latter half of the game being executed in the first special game state, the right hit notification (medium) or Although the configuration is configured to execute (large), the present invention is not limited to this. After being notified of a winning result, it is common to shift to the winning gaming state, so even if the right-handed hit notification (medium) or (large) is made regardless of the number of reservations, the winning gaming state will not occur. Since the player recognizes that this is a right-handed notification, there is little sense of discomfort. Furthermore, since the game is in the high-frequency support mode until the end of the game round, the player's profits will not be significantly impaired even if he hits right.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, the number of consecutive wins is suggested during the V jackpot game state, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of consecutive wins may be suggested during the special winning game state. It is also possible to configure the system to suggest the number of consecutive wins at the timing of transition from the V jackpot game state to the second special game state, that is, at the start of the game round.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment and the like, the second operating port 34 is given preferential treatment compared to the first operating port 33 so as to be more advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, even though it is possible to acquire the hold related to the second operating port 34, the second special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode ends without acquiring the hold. The advantage in playing the game can vary greatly. In particular, in the first embodiment, etc., a limiter is used to forcibly interrupt the continuation of the high-frequency support mode, and at such a break, the progress of the game is greatly affected by the presence or absence of suspension. It will be done. This is considered to be a factor that impairs the fairness between players who have a deep understanding of gaming machines and players who have a shallow understanding of gaming machines, and is a hindrance to increasing attention to gaming. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised in consideration of such circumstances. Specifically, the right-hand hit notification process corresponding to the second special performance mode, which is executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 as a part of regular processing, is characteristic. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70, the right-handed hitting notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode will be described. Note that, in the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly explained, and descriptions of configurations common to the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

<Right-handed notification processing compatible with the second special production mode>
In the right-handed hitting notification process corresponding to the second special performance mode, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not right-handed hitting notification is being emphasized.

In this embodiment, the right-handed hitting notification in the second special effect mode includes a basic right-handed hitting notification LV0, a right-handed hitting notification LV1 that is more emphasized than the right-handed hitting notification LV0, and a right-handed hitting notification LV1 that is more emphasized than the right-handed hitting notification LV1. A right-handed hit notification LV2 is provided (see FIG. 71). In the right-handed hit notification LV0, a small ">>right-handed hit>>" is displayed in the corner of the display screen G (an area that does not overlap with the symbol variation display completion area). However, the output of the sound effect for notifying right-handed players by the speaker unit 64 is stopped, and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a is also turned off. On the other hand, in the right-handed hitting notification LV1, an effect is added to the characters ">> right-handed hitting >>" displayed in the corner of the display screen G, and the effect for right-handed hitting is sent from the speaker section 64. A sound is output and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a lights up. In the right-handed hitting notification LV2, the text ">>Right-handed hitting >>" is displayed in an enlarged manner so as to overlap with a part of the variable display area of the symbol on the display screen G, and the speaker section 64 displays a message for right-handed hitting notification. A sound effect is output, and the LED attached to the electric accessory 34a lights up. Note that the volume of the sound effect and the amount of light of the LED in the right-handed hitting notification LV2 are larger than those in the right-handed hitting notification LV1.

If the right-handed hit notification is not the right-handed hit notification LV1 or the right-handed hit notification LV2, a negative determination is made in step S3301 and the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether or not a predetermined grace period has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the symbols on the actuation port display section 43, that is, the start of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41. If a negative determination is made in step S3302, the present right-handed hitting notification process is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process advances to step S3303.

In step S3303, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, the process advances to step S3304. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the limiter is activated due to the current win, and it is possible to shift to the third special game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3304, the process advances to step S3305.

In step S3305, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3305, the present right-handed hitting notification process is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3305, the process advances to step S3306. After executing the right-handed hitting notification first emphasis process in step S3306, the present right-handed hitting notification process ends. In the right-handed hitting notification first emphasis processing, the right-handed hitting notification is switched from right-handed hitting notification LV0 to right-handed hitting notification LV1.

Returning to the explanation of step S3304, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, that is, if the limiter is scheduled to operate, the process advances to step S3307. In step S3307, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3307, the present right-handed hitting notification process is immediately terminated. When a negative determination is made in step S3307, the right-handed hitting notification second emphasis process is executed in step S3308, and then the main right-handed hitting notification process is ended. In the right-handed hitting notification second emphasis process, the right-handed hitting notification is switched from right-handed hitting notification LV0 to right-handed hitting notification LV2.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3303, that is, if the current game round corresponds to the winning result, the process advances to step S3309. In step S3309, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3309, that is, if the result is a failure and the number of reservations related to the second actuating port 34 has reached the upper limit, the process for notifying the right-hand hit is directly ended. If a negative determination is made in step S3309, that is, if the result is a failure and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit, the process advances to step S3310. In step S3310, emphasis propriety determination processing is executed. Specifically, with reference to a determination table for fake emphasis stored in the ROM 243, it is determined whether or not to emphasize right-handed hitting notification. If it is determined in the determination process of step S3310 that the emphasis is not to be emphasized, a negative determination is made in step S3311, and the present right-handed hitting notification process is immediately terminated. If it is determined in step S3310 that the emphasis is to be emphasized, the process advances to either step S3311 or step S3308, and after executing the emphasis processing for right-handed hitting notification, the present right-handed hitting notification processing is ended. Note that the transition destination from step S3311, that is, the emphasis level, is determined in step S3310.

Returning to the explanation of step S3301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, that is, if the right-handed hit notification is being emphasized, the process advances to step S3312. In step S3312, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3312, the emphasis canceling process is executed in step S3313, and then the present right-handed hitting notification process is ended. By executing the emphasis canceling process, the right-handed hit notification LV0 is returned.

If a negative determination is made in step S3312, it is determined in step S3314 whether or not it is the timing to end the second special effect mode. If a negative determination is made in step S3314, the present right-handed hitting notification process is immediately terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3314, the emphasis canceling process is executed in step S3313, and then the present right-handed hitting notification process is ended.

Here, with reference to FIG. 72, an example will be given of the flow of emphasizing the right-handed hit notification in the second special effect mode (second special game state). FIG. 72 shows a flow of the game when a special winning result occurs during the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode, and the state shifts to the special winning game state, and the limiter operates to shift to the first special game state. FIG.

<Flow of emphasizing right-handed notification>
At the timing of tf1, the state has shifted from the jackpot game state to the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode. At the timing of tf1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbol on the second operating port display section BS and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 change. It has been started. Further, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gate 35. The game round started at the timing tf1 corresponds to a special winning result, and at the timing tf2 after a predetermined grace period has passed from the timing tf1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is still at the upper limit. not reached. The limiter is scheduled to be activated depending on this special winning result. For the above reasons, the right-handed hit notification is switched from the right-handed hit notification LV0 to the right-handed hit notification LV2.

Thereafter, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 at the timing of tf3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "2" to "3". Then, at the timing of tf4, a winning occurs in the second operating port 3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "3" to "4". When the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the right-handed hit notification is switched from the right-handed hit notification LV2 to the right-handed hit notification LV0.

At timing tf5, the fluctuating display of the symbols on the second operating port display section BS and the fluctuating display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are completed, and the game result is clearly shown to the player. Thereafter, at the timing of tf6, the second special game state shifts to the special winning game state. As the V winning occurs at the timing of tf7, the special winning gaming state shifts to the V jackpot gaming state at the timing of tf8, when the special winning gaming state ends. After the end of this V jackpot game state, a transition is made to a third special game state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode due to the influence of the limiter, and the game progresses by holding the remaining second operating ports 34.

In addition, even if the high-frequency support mode is entered, the reservation related to the second operating port 34 cannot be obtained unless the procedure of winning through the through gate 35 → support lottery → winning the second operating port 34 is completed, and the reservation related to the second operating port 34 cannot be obtained. A certain period of time is required. By setting a predetermined grace period, it is possible to prevent the function from becoming a factor that gives the impression that the function is troublesome to the player, such as frequent emphasis.

In the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the support mode switches from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode as the second special game state shifts to the third special game state, and the second operating port 34 It becomes virtually impossible for the ball to enter the ball. In such a configuration, the more pending information acquired and stored during the second special gaming state and carried over from the second special gaming state to the third special gaming state, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. In the second special game state, since the game state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention tends to be directed to the game repeating motions, effects performed during the game play, etc. I think it will attract less attention. Here, in the third special game state, if there is a winning result, the player can shift to the first special game state. There is a high possibility that people will not be able to enjoy the benefits that they would have otherwise been able to receive. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this embodiment, in a game round that results in a winning result in the second special game state, if the number of stored pending information has not reached the upper limit, Information is emphasized. In this way, by configuring the player to prompt the player to acquire pending information, the number of pending information related to the second operating port 34 becomes insufficient when transitioning to the third special game state, which puts the player at a disadvantage. suppressing things. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

In a configuration that controls the number of consecutive wins (so-called limiter), when the number of games in the second special game state reaches the end standard number of times (specified number of times), the system is forcibly shifted to the third game state compatible with the low-frequency support mode. , the player's desire to play may decrease. At this time, as mentioned above, if the player is unable to enjoy the benefits that he or she should have been able to get due to lack of reservation information, there is a concern that the player's desire to play will be significantly reduced. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided by emphasizing the suggestion of firing the game ball toward the second actuation port 34 at least in a situation where the limiter can be activated. can be suitably suppressed.

Since the third special game state is a game state in which consecutive wins can be expected, the player's attention tends to be directed to the performance. Here, there is a concern that if the above-mentioned firing suggestion is emphasized too much, there is a high possibility that the suggestion will give the impression to the player that the suggestion is a nuisance. Therefore, as shown in this embodiment, if the firing suggestion is emphasized by the right-hand hit notification (LV1) when the limiter is not activated and by the right-hand hit notification (LV2) when the limiter is activated, a negative effect on the emphasis function can be created. The impression can be suitably wiped away.

At the start of a game round, the amount of reservation information stored in the second operation opening reservation area Rb decreases. In other words, the number of stored pending information is always less than the upper limit. There is a concern that emphasizing the suggestion each time will cause the suggestion to be emphasized frequently, increasing the possibility of giving the impression that it is bothersome to the player. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, by providing a grace period in which emphasis is not possible after the start of a game round, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

In the above-described configuration, if the emphasis is limited to occurrence = winning result, there is a concern that the performance effects of other performances performed during a game round will be reduced. Therefore, by creating a configuration in which suggestions can be emphasized in some cases where the number of pending information is insufficient even in game times that result in a winning result, even if the emphasis occurs, the suggestion can be emphasized in cases where a winning result occurs and a negative result. Both cases occur. Even if such fake emphasis is performed, the player will not be disadvantaged.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the degree of emphasis (level) of right-handed hitting notification is made different depending on whether the limiter is activated or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the degree of emphasis of the right-handed hit notification is made the same (unified) when the limiter is activated and when it is not activated.

<Modification 2>
Regarding the predetermined grace period shown in the fourth embodiment, it is also possible to change the predetermined grace period according to the remaining number of reservations that can be obtained (the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34). For example, a difference may be provided such that the smaller the number of obtainable reservations, the longer the predetermined grace period.

Furthermore, in a configuration in which the game result is clearly displayed through the ready-to-reach display, it is also possible to set the length of the predetermined grace period so that a predetermined grace period elapses after the transition to the ready-to-reach display.

<Modification 3>
In the fourth embodiment, the right hit notification during the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode is devised, but the present invention is not limited to this. The same idea may be applied to the right hit notification during the second special game state corresponding to the continuous production mode.

<Modification 4>
In the fourth embodiment, when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in a situation where the right-handed hit notification is emphasized, the emphasis on the right-handed hit notification is canceled and the right-handed hit notification is emphasized. Although the configuration is such that the notification is returned to LV0, if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in a situation where the right-handed hit notification is emphasized, the right-handed hit notification itself is configured to be terminated. is also possible. Furthermore, even if the number of reservations related to the second actuating port 34 reaches the upper limit in a situation where right-handed hitting notification is emphasized, it is also possible to continue emphasizing right-handed hitting notification.

<Modification 5>
In the second special performance mode, after repeating the variable display → stop display of each symbol row (hereinafter referred to as unit performance or unit display) multiple times on the symbol display device 41 during one game, the symbol corresponding to the game result is displayed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a special variable display is performed in which the combination is displayed in a stopped state (for example, see FIG. 73). In particular, if such a special variation is made in the game round corresponding to the winning result, the player will be made to feel as if the hold has been used up, even though the hold has not actually been used up, and the player will be able to play the right route. It is possible to encourage the firing of game balls toward the player. The above-described emphasis on the right-handed hit notification may be configured to be executed at a timing after the unit performance has been executed at least once at the beginning of the game round.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment and the like, the second operating port 34 is given preferential treatment compared to the first operating port 33 so as to be more advantageous to the player. In such a configuration, even though it is possible to acquire the hold related to the second operating port 34, the second special game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode ends without acquiring the hold. The degree of advantage in playing the game can vary greatly. In particular, in the first embodiment, etc., a limiter is used to forcibly interrupt the continuation of the high-frequency support mode, and at such a break, the progress of the game is greatly affected by the presence or absence of suspension. It will be done. This is considered to be a factor that impairs the fairness between players who have a deep understanding of gaming machines and players who have a shallow understanding of gaming machines, and is a hindrance to increasing attention to gaming. One of the features of this embodiment is that it has been devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, first, with reference to the schematic diagram in FIG. 73, the variable display mode of symbols during the second special performance mode in this embodiment will be explained, and then, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74, the notification/performance control device 82 The advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode, which is executed by the MPU 242 as part of the regular process, will be explained. Note that in the following description, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly explained, and descriptions of configurations common to the first embodiment will be basically omitted.

<Fluctuating display mode>
As shown in FIG. 73(a), when the symbol variable display mode in the symbol display device 41 is the first variable display mode, the timing at which the symbol variable display in the actuation opening display section 43 is started. The symbol display device 41 starts to display the symbols in a variable manner at the same timing as the symbol display device 41, and the symbol display device 41 starts displaying the symbols in the symbol display device 41 at the same timing as when the symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the actuating mouth display section 43. The symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed (determined display). In other words, the structure is such that the changing display of symbols→stop display is executed once during one game.

On the other hand, in the second special performance mode, the variable display mode of symbols on the symbol display device 41 becomes the second variable display mode. In this second variable display mode, as shown in FIG. 73(b), during one game, each symbol row is displayed in the symbol display device 41 in variable display → stopped display (hereinafter referred to as unit performance or unit display). After repeating this a plurality of times, a special variable display is executed in which the symbol combination corresponding to the game result is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, although the hold has not actually been used up, it is possible to make the player think that the hold has been used up, and to encourage him to shoot the game ball toward the right route.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned unit performances are repeated, that is, when the winning result is notified to the player in the last unit performance during a game, and when the unit performance is other than the last unit performance. In some cases, the player may be notified of the winning result. That is, if a predetermined condition is met, the winning result may be announced in advance (pre-notification) without waiting for the final unit performance. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special performance mode, which is executed by the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82 as part of the regular process, will be described.

<Advance notification processing compatible with the second special effect mode>
In the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not advance notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process advances to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether the advance notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process advances to step S3403.

In step S3403, it is determined whether the current game round corresponds to a winning result. If a negative determination is made in step S3403, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, it is determined in step S3404 whether or not the limiter is scheduled to operate in the current winning result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3403, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3404, the process advances to step S3405.

In step S3405, it is determined whether the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S3405, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3405, the process advances to step S3406. In step S3406, it is determined whether it is the completion timing of the unit performance. If a negative determination is made in step S3406, the process advances to step S3407, and it is determined whether or not the final unit presentation is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3407, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3407, the process advances to step S3408, and after setting the advance notification flag in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process for advance notification corresponding to the second special effect mode is ended.

Returning to the explanation of step S3402, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, that is, if the advance notification flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process advances to step S3409. In step S3409, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to complete the unit performance. If a negative determination is made in step S3409, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3409, advance notification start processing is executed in step S3401, and then the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is ended.

In the advance notification start process, a sound effect corresponding to the advance notification is output from the speaker section 64, and the light emitting mode of the display light emitting section 63 is switched to a light emission mode corresponding to the advance notice. Then, the advance notification command is output to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 to display a message image corresponding to the advance notification (for example, "Preparing for V release") based on receiving this advance notification command.

In addition, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3406, that is, when it is the unit performance completion timing, after executing advance notification start processing in step S3410, advance notification processing corresponding to the second special performance mode is executed. finish. In other words, if the conditions for advance notification are met during a unit performance, depending on the detailed timing, a branch will occur, such as whether the advance notification will start immediately or wait for the next unit performance. becomes. This is a contrivance to make it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have lost a game round, such as when the unit performance in the special variable display performance is interrupted midway.

Here, an overview of advance notification interruption will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75(a) is a schematic diagram showing a special fluctuation display in a game round in which advance notification does not occur, and FIG. 75(b) is a schematic diagram showing a special fluctuation display in a game round in which advance notification occurs.

In FIG. 75(a), after the game round corresponding to the winning result is started and the unit performance is repeated a plurality of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed on the active line on the display screen G (determined display ) has been done. In this example, the game progresses without the number of reservations related to the second operation port 34 reaching the upper limit during the game round, and the number of reservations is still less than the upper limit even when the final unit performance is executed. Therefore, the condition for advance notification is not satisfied, and the winning result is announced without going through advance notification. In addition, in each unit performance executed before the final unit performance, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped and displayed).

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 75(b), after a winning result and a game round in which the limiter is not scheduled to activate is started, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34, and the second operating port 34 The number of pending items has reached the upper limit. In this case, a message image corresponding to the advance notification is displayed at the center of the display screen G so as to interrupt the immediately following unit performance. In other words, one unit performance is replaced with the display of the message image. Thereafter, the message image is displayed in a reduced state above and below the variable display area of the symbol, and the unit performance is executed under the condition where the message image is displayed. By giving advance notice in this way, it is possible to urge the player not to perform the operation of firing the game ball.

Returning to the explanation of the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode in FIG. 74, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, that is, if advance notification is being executed, the process advances to step S3411. In step S3411, it is determined whether the timing is before the completion of the final unit performance, specifically, the timing immediately before the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed. If a negative determination is made in step S3411, the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is immediately terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3411, the advance notification end process is executed in step S34112, and then the advance notification process corresponding to the second special effect mode is ended.

In advance notification termination processing, after blacking out the display screen G, the message image "Preparing to release V" is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G while maintaining that state, and the message image is hidden. do. By hiding this message image, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is re-displayed in a stopped display (determined display) state.

The flow of advance notification in the second special effect mode (second special game state) will be explained below with reference to FIG. In FIG. 76, a special win (limiter non-operation) occurs in the first game after transitioning from the jackpot game state to the second special game state, and during the game that becomes the special win, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 is It is a timing chart illustrating a case where the upper limit is reached.

<Flow of advance notification>
At the timing of tg1, the state has shifted from the jackpot game state to the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode. At the timing of tg1, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the symbols on the display section BS for the second operating port and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 change. It has been started. Further, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state based on the winning of the through gate 35. For the game round that started at the timing of tg1, it corresponds to the special winning result, and at the timing of tg2 when the second unit performance starts, the right-handed hit notification changes from right-handed hit notification (small) to right-handed hit notification (large). ) has been switched.

Thereafter, a winning occurs in the second operating port 34 at the timing of tg3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "2" to "3". Then, at the timing of tg4, a winning occurs in the second operating port 3, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 increases from "3" to "4". When the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, the right-handed hit notification is switched from right-handed hit notification (large) to right-handed hit notification (small). Further, at this timing, the above-mentioned pre-notification conditions are satisfied, and the device enters the pre-notification standby mode.

Advance notification is started at timing tg5 when the third unit performance is started. As a result, a message image "Preparing for V release" will be displayed in the center of the display screen G instead of the symbol. At timing tg6 when the fourth unit presentation (final unit display) is started, the message image of advance notification is displayed in a reduced size at the top and bottom of the display screen G, and the symbol is redisplayed.

At the subsequent timing tg7, the display screen G is blacked out, and the advance notification message image is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen G, and the symbols are not displayed. Then, at the timing of tg8 immediately after, that is, at the timing when the symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the second operating port display section BS, the advance notification is canceled and the symbol combination corresponding to the special winning result is placed on the active line. The symbol will be redisplayed while the display is stopped. This clearly indicates to the player that a winning result has been achieved.

At the subsequent timing tg9, the second special game state is shifted to the special winning game state. As the V winning occurs at the timing of tg10, the special winning gaming state shifts to the V jackpot gaming state at the timing of tfg11, when the special winning gaming state ends.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, in a game round that results in a winning result during the third special game state, the number of pending information reaches the upper limit during the fluctuating display of the symbols for the game round, and the result is a winning result. Advance notification will be given as a special indication that the game will move to the gaming state. By providing a relationship between the number of pending information and advance notification in this way, it is possible to encourage players who expect advance notification to aim for reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

The above-mentioned advance notice is configured to continue at least until the game round (for example, variable display) in which the advance notice was started ends. By configuring the advance notification to continue until the end of the corresponding game round in this manner, it is possible to suitably prevent the advance notification from being overlooked.

If a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of symbols on the actuator opening display started, even if the number of pending information reaches the upper limit during a game round that results in a winning result in the third special game state, There is no configuration in which notification is not performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of advance notification immediately before the end of a game round, for example. This is preferable in order to prevent players from being confused by the combination of notification of winning results and advance notification and suggestion.

<Modification 1>
In the fifth embodiment, one of the conditions for starting advance notification is that the winning result is related to the limiter being inactivated, but this condition may be omitted. In other words, during the second special production mode, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which the execution condition for advance notification is satisfied when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit in the game round corresponding to the winning result. be. In other words, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which advance notification is performed when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit, regardless of whether the winning result is related to limiter activation/non-activation. In this case, for example, it is preferable to display an image "Preparing to release V" as a preliminary notification when the limiter is not activated, and display an image "Preparing for ending" as a preliminary notification when the limiter is activated.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the prior notification is executed only in the game round that corresponds to the winning result, but if the subsequent hold includes the one corresponding to the winning result, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which advance notification is started in game rounds corresponding to the result, and the advance notification is continued over those game rounds. However, in the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to add to the pre-notification conditions that there is no winning result scheduled to activate the limiter in the game round immediately after the winning result. This is a contrivance to suppress the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 from becoming smaller than expected when the limiter is activated to shift to the third special game state.

<Modification 3>
In the fifth embodiment, the right-handed notification is not executed during advance notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which right-handed notification is executed even during advance notification. In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable to execute the right-handed hitting notification using the above-mentioned right-handed hitting notification (small) so that the advance notification and the right-handed hitting notification coexist on the display screen G.

<Modification 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the winning result is clearly shown in the final unit display, but when transitioning from the second special game state to the special winning game state, the game state can be quickly switched. At the same time, in order to ensure the certainty of the occurrence of V winnings, it is preferable to start the right hit notification for V winnings in the game round during the second special game state. In consideration of such circumstances, a unit performance that stops displaying (determined display) the symbol combination corresponding to the winning result is executed before the final unit performance, and for the final unit performance, a right-hit notification for V winning is executed. (For example, see FIG. 43(b)) may be set as the execution period.

<Modification 5>
In the fifth embodiment, the symbol variable display mode in the second special production mode is the second variable display mode, but the symbol variable display mode in the second special production mode is also the first variable display mode. It is also possible to do so. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which advance notification is started at the timing when the execution condition for advance notification is satisfied.

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, when the execution condition for advance notification is satisfied during a unit performance, the start of advance notification is delayed until the unit performance is completed, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not a thing. If the execution condition for advance notification is satisfied during a unit performance, it is also possible to configure the advance notification to be started at that timing.

<Modification 6>
In the fifth embodiment, the prior notification is executed in the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode, but the function of the advance notification is changed to the second special game state compatible with the continuous performance mode. It is also possible to apply

<Modification 7>
In the fifth embodiment, based on the fact that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has reached the upper limit in the game round corresponding to the winning result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. While advance notification is executed, if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit in the game round corresponding to the winning result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special effect mode. Although the configuration is such that advance notification is not performed, the present invention is not limited to this. While advance notification is executed based on the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaching the upper limit in the game round corresponding to the winning result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode, If a predetermined condition is satisfied in the game round corresponding to the winning result executed during the second special game state corresponding to the second special performance mode, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 has not reached the upper limit. It is also possible to configure a configuration in which advance notification is executed even if there is a problem. For example, if the subsequent holds do not include a hold corresponding to a winning result in which the limiter is activated, it is also possible to configure a configuration in which the preliminary notification is executed when the preliminary notification generation lottery is won.

<Modification 8>
In the fifth embodiment described above, the period during which the message image "Preparing to release V" is displayed in the center of the display screen G is set to be the same length as the execution period of the unit performance, but the period is limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, the period during which the message image "Preparing to release V" is displayed in the center of the display screen G may be set to be an integral multiple of the execution period of the unit performance, such as twice, three times, four times, etc. is also possible.

<Modification 9>
In the fifth embodiment, the prior notification is not executed even if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit performance, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the number of reservations related to the second actuating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit performance, advance notification is executed if an execution period for advance notification can be secured until the confirmation display. It is also possible to do this.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the prior notification is not executed even if the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit during the final unit performance, but the reservation related to the second operating port 34 It is sufficient if the configuration is such that when the number reaches the upper limit, it is configured to determine whether or not to execute advance notification based on the number of executions of the remaining unit performances (remaining time of the relevant game round), for example, during the final unit performance. In addition to this, even if the number of reservations related to the second operation port 34 reaches the upper limit during the unit performance one before the final unit performance, it is also possible to configure the prior notification not to be executed.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the above-mentioned advance notification is not performed if a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the game round when the number of reservations related to the second operating port 34 reaches the upper limit.

<Modification 10>
If a ball enters a ball entering section such as the through gate 35 on the right route during advance notification, the current performance (display) on the symbol display device 41 changes based on the ball entering. It is also possible. For example, the message image "Preparing to release V" may be enlarged each time a ball enters, or the arrangement of symbols being scrolled may change (for example, the number of "7" symbols will increase). You can also use it as

<Other embodiments>
Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in each of the embodiments described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or a part or all of them may be applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, when the main controller 81 performs a lottery based on the hold information related to the operating port, the picture on the operating port display section 43 is displayed at the same time as the lottery (in detail, immediately after the lottery). Although the configuration is such that the variable display of the symbols and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are started, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of the symbols on the operating port display section 43 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are started prior to the lottery.

In addition, when the main control device 81 performs a lottery based on the reservation information related to the through gate 35, the symbol display unit and the symbol fluctuation display on the through gate display unit 44 simultaneously with the lottery (more specifically, immediately after the lottery) Although the configuration is such that the variable display of symbols starts at 41, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of the symbols on the through gate display section 44 and the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 are started prior to the lottery.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, a difference in advantage is provided between the lottery related to the first operating port 33 and the lottery related to the second operating port 34, but a difference in advantage is not provided for each lottery. It may also be a configuration. Further, it is also possible to reverse the advantageous/disadvantageous relationship so that the lottery related to the first operating port 33 is more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the second operating port 34.

(3) In each of the above embodiments, a special winning result can be won by a lottery based on a winning in the first operating port 33, but a special winning result can be won in a lottery based on a winning in the first operating port 33. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the winner is not selected.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the game round related to the second operating port 34 is executed more preferentially than the game time related to the first operating port 33, but the second operating port 34 A configuration may be adopted in which the game round related to the first operating port 33 is executed preferentially than the game time concerned. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the game times related to the first operating port 33 and the game times related to the second operating port 34 are executed in the order in which the pending information is acquired (in the order of winnings). Furthermore, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the game round related to the first operating port 33 and the game time related to the second operating port 34 are executed in parallel.

(5) In each of the above embodiments, the probability of a special winning result is set higher for the lottery based on winnings in the second operating port 34 than in the lottery based on winnings in the first operating port 33. In the case of a special winning result, the special game state is configured to function as a pseudo high probability game state in which a jackpot is achieved with a high probability by shifting to the high frequency support mode by winning a V prize. The specific configuration for generating the gaming state is not limited to the above. For example, in a so-called fixed machine or an ST machine, there are a low probability mode with a low probability of winning and a high probability mode with a high probability of winning as lottery modes based on winnings in the first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34. It is also possible to create a high probability gaming state by providing a low probability mode and a high probability mode.

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the reference number of ends in the first special game state (the reference number of ends for the second operating port 34) is set to "1", but this number is arbitrary. For example, it may be performed twice, or may be performed three times or more. However, in order to differentiate it from the second special game state, it is preferable that the end standard number of times is less than "100".

(7) In each of the above embodiments, the notification/effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are provided separately, but it is also possible to provide one control device that integrates the functions of these control devices 82 and 212. .

(8) Although the second operating port 34 shown in each of the above embodiments can be switched between an open state that allows the entry of a game ball and a closed state that prohibits the entry of a game ball, it allows the entry of a game ball. It is also possible to configure the switchable state between a first state in which the ball is opened and a second state in which entering the ball is more difficult than the open state. Further, similar changes may be made to the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B.

(9) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that opens a game ball in a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine in which a jackpot is generated when a ball enters the machine, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arranged ball machine, and a mahjong ball machine.

In addition, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that gives a player a benefit such as a payout of medals if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an active line that can be seen from a display window after the reels have stopped. can be applied.

Furthermore, the game machine main body supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner is provided with a storage section and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The following feature group A is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature A1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) function to perform migration processing),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
The special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state, and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and stored in the special information storage means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the special information carried over to the first gaming state has a structure in which the benefits given to the player in the case of the winning result are different.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after the transition to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round have different values. do. That is, there is a difference in benefits depending on whether the winning result is achieved in a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state) or whether the winning result is achieved after the end of the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). Even if the special information is acquired based on the entry of balls into the same starting ball entry area, if the value changes depending on the change in the situation in which the game is played, it will be possible to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the game. It can contribute to increasing the attention of

Feature A2. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) function to perform migration processing),
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control modes (support modes) by the switching control means include a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game states) are provided.
a first game state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state, and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and stored in the special information storage means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information has a structure in which the benefits given to the player in the case of the winning result are different.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the ball enters the starting ball entering section easily, and special information becomes easy to accumulate. Here, the special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first game state have different values. That is, there is a difference in benefits depending on whether the winning result is achieved in a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state) or whether the winning result is achieved after the end of the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). In other words, after transitioning to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and the game round progresses substantially only with the special information stored during the second gaming state. It happens. Here, even if the value of the special information acquired by the ball entering the starting ball entry section after the transition to the second game state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the special information will change depending on the situation in which the game is executed. It can suppress monotony and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A3. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special gaming state transition means for shifting the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state (opening/closing execution mode by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) function to perform migration processing),
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game states) are provided.
a first game state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
Special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) that reached the predetermined number of times in the second game state, and special information acquired during the second game state and stored in the special information storage means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the special information carried over to the first gaming state has a structure in which a benefit given to the player in the case of the winning result is different.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the ball enters the starting ball entering section easily, and special information becomes easy to accumulate. Here, the special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round in the second gaming state and the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state have different values. That is, there is a difference in benefits depending on whether the winning result is achieved in a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state) or whether the winning result is achieved after the end of the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). In other words, after transitioning to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and the game round progresses substantially only with the special information stored during the second gaming state. It happens. Here, even if the value of the special information acquired by the ball entering the starting ball entry section after the transition to the second game state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the special information will change depending on the situation in which the game is executed. It can suppress monotony and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A4. The predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times,
If the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state corresponds to the winning result, in the second gaming state to which the transition occurs after the end of the special gaming state. The first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit,
If the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, after the special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second gaming state to which the game is transferred.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the reference number of times for ending the second game state, is configured to be different, the special information acquired during the second game state can result in a winning result during the first game state. In this case, the second game state is entered again, and it becomes possible to try again to win in a predetermined game round. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that this feature can also be applied to feature A2. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. In other words, "the predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times, and the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state is the winning number." If it corresponds to the result, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second game state to which the transition occurs after the end of the special game state, and the first predetermined number of times is acquired during the predetermined game time and stored in the special information storage means. If the special information carried over to the first gaming state while being stored corresponds to the winning result, the second predetermined number of times will be given as the benefit in the second gaming state to which the special gaming state transitions after the end of the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to set the following.

Feature A5. The predetermined number of times includes a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times that is smaller than the first predetermined number of times,
If the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state corresponds to the winning result, then regarding the second gaming state to which the transition is made after the end of the special gaming state. The first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit,
If the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, after the special gaming state ends. The gaming machine according to feature A3, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit for the second gaming state to which the transition is made.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the reference number of times for ending the second game state, is configured to be different, the special information acquired during the second game state can result in a winning result during the first game state. In this case, the second game state is entered again, and it becomes possible to try again to win in a predetermined game round. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

In particular, by setting the first predetermined number of times > the second predetermined number of times, the flow of the game will be greatly tilted to the advantageous side by a winning result in the predetermined game round, and whether or not a winning result will occur during the predetermined game round. The monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed by increasing the sharpness depending on whether the special information carried over to the first game state results in a winning result.

Note that this feature can also be applied to feature A2. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "the predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times smaller than the first predetermined number of times, and the trigger for starting the predetermined game time when the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. If the special information corresponding to the winning result corresponds to the winning result, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit for the second gaming state to which the transition occurs after the end of the special gaming state, and the second predetermined gaming number is set as the benefit. If the special information acquired during a game and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, the second gaming state to which the special information is transferred after the end of the special gaming state corresponds to the winning result. The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the bonus for the gaming state.

Feature A6. The first predetermined number of times is greater than the upper limit of the number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, and the second predetermined number of times is less than the upper limit. Game machine.

According to feature A6, a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to enhance the variety of the game. Note that the first predetermined number of times may be set to a number at which the next winning result is determined or substantially determined. With such a configuration, the differences in benefits can be made clear.

Feature A7. If the winning result is due to the special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state, the winning result is obtained during the predetermined game round. The game is characterized by comprising a benefit granting means for granting a greater benefit to the player than in the case of the winning result based on the special information carried over to the second gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that preferential benefits are given when a winning result is achieved in a predetermined game round, it is possible to increase the tension of the game round in the predetermined game round. In addition, even if the winning result is not achieved in the predetermined game round, the player can try again for the smaller award based on the special information that has been obtained, and the player can It is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that rapidly reduces the desire to play.

Feature A8. If the winning result is due to the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means, the special game is triggered by the winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, further comprising means for transitioning to the second gaming state after the state ends.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that if the special information carried over to the first gaming state results in a winning result, the system returns to the second gaming state, it is possible to retry winning in a predetermined gaming cycle in a short cycle. becomes. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Feature A9. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (specially executed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the predetermined game state. (a function to execute processing for transition to a winning game state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
The special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state, and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first gaming state is given to the player when the winning result occurs and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by having different configurations of benefits (time saving times).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after the transition to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round have different values. do. In other words, the game depends on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state) or the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). There will be differences in the benefits granted to individuals. Even if the special information is acquired based on the entry of balls into the same starting ball entry area, if the value changes depending on the change in the situation in which the game is played, it will be possible to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the game. It can contribute to increasing the attention of

Feature A10. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (opened/closed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the function to execute the process of transitioning to execution mode),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. A function for executing processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in the MPU 112);
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game states) are provided.
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state, and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and stored in the special information storage means. The information includes a configuration in which the benefits (number of time reductions) given to the player are different when the winning result occurs and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the ball enters the starting ball entering section easily, and special information becomes easy to accumulate. Here, the special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round and the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first game state have different values. In other words, it depends on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state), or whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). There will be a difference in benefits. In other words, after transitioning to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and the game round progresses substantially only with the special information stored during the second gaming state. It happens. Here, even if the value of the special information acquired by the ball entering the starting ball entry section after the transition to the second game state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the special information will change depending on the situation in which the game is executed. It can suppress monotony and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entrance part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the second operating port 34 in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that acquires special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notifying means (second operation) is configured to determine that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and that the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function of controlling the display of the second operating mouth display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (opened/closed by the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (open/close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the function to execute the process of transitioning to execution mode),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. A function for executing processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in the MPU 112);
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode and a second gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. 2 special game states) are provided.
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
Special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) that reached the predetermined number of times in the second game state, and special information acquired during the second game state and stored in the special information storage means. The special information carried over to the first gaming state is the special information that is given to the player when the winning result occurs and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by having different configurations of benefits (number of time savings).

According to the configuration shown in this feature, by shifting to the second gaming state on the advantageous side, the ball enters the starting ball entering section easily, and special information becomes easy to accumulate. Here, the special information that triggered the start of a predetermined game round in the second gaming state and the special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state have different values. In other words, it depends on whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during a predetermined game round (during the second gaming state), or whether the winning result → the predetermined transition condition is satisfied after the predetermined gaming round (during the first gaming state). There will be a difference in benefits. In other words, after transitioning to the first gaming state, it becomes difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and the game round progresses substantially only with the special information stored during the second gaming state. It happens. Here, even if the value of the special information acquired by the ball entering the starting ball entry section after the transition to the second game state changes depending on the situation in which the game is executed, the value of the special information will change depending on the situation in which the game is executed. It can suppress monotony and contribute to increasing attention to the game.

Feature A12. The predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times,
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state corresponds to the winning result, and the predetermined information during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. If the transition condition is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second gaming state to which the transition occurs after the second special gaming state ends;
The special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, and the first game is triggered by the winning result. If the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the special game state, the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second game state to which the game transitions after the end of the second special game state. The gaming machine according to feature A11.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the reference number of times for ending the second gaming state, is configured to be different, the winning result → the predetermined number during the first gaming state will be changed based on the special information acquired during the second gaming state. If the transition conditions are met, the game will transition to the second gaming state again, and it will be possible to try again to win in a predetermined game. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that this feature can also be applied to feature A10. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. In other words, "the predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times, and the special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state is the winning number." If the result corresponds to the predetermined transition condition and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second gaming state to which the transition occurs after the end of the second special gaming state, and the predetermined game If the special information acquired during the game and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result and the predetermined transition condition is satisfied, 2. The gaming machine according to feature A10, characterized in that the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit in the second gaming state to which the game enters after the end of the second special gaming state.

Feature A13. The predetermined number of times includes a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times that is smaller than the first predetermined number of times,
The special information that triggered the start of the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times has been reached in the second gaming state corresponds to the winning result, and the predetermined information is displayed during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result. If the transition condition is satisfied, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit for the second gaming state to be transitioned to after the end of the second special gaming state,
The special information acquired during the second gaming state and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the winning result, and the first game is triggered by the winning result. If the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the special gaming state, the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit for the second gaming state to which the transition occurs after the end of the second special gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature A3.

As shown in this feature, if the predetermined number of times, which is the reference number of times for ending the second game state, is configured to be different, the special information acquired during the second game state can result in a winning result during the first game state. In this case, the second game state is entered again, and it becomes possible to try again to win in a predetermined game round. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

In particular, by setting the first predetermined number of times > the second predetermined number of times, the flow of the game will be greatly tilted to the advantageous side by a winning result in the predetermined game round, and whether or not a winning result will occur during the predetermined game round. The monotony of the game can be suitably suppressed by increasing the sharpness depending on whether the special information carried over to the first game state results in a winning result.

Note that this feature can also be applied to feature A10. In this case, the above description may be changed as follows. That is, "the predetermined number of times is a first predetermined number of times and a second predetermined number of times smaller than the first predetermined number of times, and the trigger for starting the predetermined game time when the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. If the special information corresponds to the winning result and the predetermined transition condition is met during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result, the transition will occur after the special gaming state ends. For the second gaming state, the first predetermined number of times is set as the benefit, and special information is acquired during the second predetermined gaming period and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means. corresponds to the winning result, and if the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by the winning result, a second gaming state to which the player transitions after the special gaming state ends. "The gaming machine according to feature A10, wherein the second predetermined number of times is set as the benefit."

Feature A14. The first predetermined number of times is greater than the upper limit of the number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, and the second predetermined number of times is less than the upper limit. Game machine.

According to feature A14, a practically preferable configuration can be realized in order to enhance the variety of the game. Note that the first predetermined number of times may be set to a number at which the next winning result is determined or substantially determined. With such a configuration, the differences in benefits can be made clear.

Feature A15. The first special gaming state in which the winning result occurs due to special information that triggered the start of a predetermined gaming round (for example, the first gaming round) in which the predetermined number of games is reached in the second gaming state, and the winning result becomes a trigger. If the predetermined transition condition is met during the game, the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the second game state while being stored in the special information storage means results in the winning result and Features A9 to A11 are characterized in that the game system includes a benefit granting means for granting the player a benefit larger than that in the case where the predetermined transition condition is satisfied during the first special gaming state triggered by a winning result. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that preferential benefits are given when a winning result is achieved in a predetermined game round, it is possible to increase the tension of the game round in the predetermined game round. In addition, even if the winning result is not achieved in the predetermined game round, the player can try again for the smaller award based on the special information that has been obtained, and the player can It is possible to suitably prevent this from becoming a factor that rapidly reduces the desire to play.

Feature A16. If the winning result is due to the special information acquired during the predetermined game round and carried over to the first gaming state while being stored in the special information storage means, the winning result triggers the first Features A9 to A15 include means for transitioning to the second gaming state after the end of the second special gaming state to which the transition occurs based on the establishment of the predetermined transition condition during the special gaming state. The gaming machine described in any one of the above.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the special information carried over to the first gaming state results in a winning result and the return to the second gaming state is achieved depending on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition during the first special gaming state, the cycle is short. You can re-try to win in a predetermined game round. By making it possible to proceed with such a novel game, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

<Characteristics Group B>
The following feature group B is defined as: ``A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, and a gaming ball launching means that shoots a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a shooting operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined game states include a first game state (for example, a normal game state or a third special game state) and a second game state (for example, a second special game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. has been
If the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in the second gaming state, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means A special notification means (such as a display of "V x 7") that specifies how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the information and executes a special notification (display of "V x 7", etc.) based on the specified result during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a winning number suggesting performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82.

In the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means It is specified how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included, and a special notification based on the specified result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the player is also notified of how many winning results are waiting to be played, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that goes beyond simply winning a winning result. be able to. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that the description ``a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state'' has been replaced with ``a second gaming state in which the determination result by the special information determining means is more likely to result in the winning result than the first gaming state''. ” It is also possible.

Feature B2. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine that has
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 (a function of causing the MPU 112 to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened);
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Specify how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the subsequent special information that has been displayed, and make a special notification (display of "V x 7", etc.) based on the specified result during the specified game round. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggesting performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round (last game round) in the second game state on the advantageous side, if the determination result by the special information determining means is a winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the subsequent special information, and a special notification based on the specified result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the player is also notified of how many winning results are waiting to be played, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that goes beyond simply winning a winning result. be able to. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Feature B3. Comprising a game round performance execution means (symbol display device 41 and notification/performance control device 82) that executes a game round performance in parallel with the game round operation,
The game round performance executing means is a winning performance means that executes a winning performance indicating that the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result before the game round operation ends in the predetermined game round. (Function to execute stop display of "V" symbol combination in MPU 242 of notification/production control device 82),
Feature B1 or B2 is characterized in that the special notification means is configured to execute the special notification after the winning performance is shown by the winning performance by the winning performance means. The game machine described.

According to feature B3, after the winning performance is executed, the player is also informed of how many winning results are waiting, so it is possible to dramatically increase the attention to a given game round. .

Feature B4. In the winning performance, the winning performance means is configured to display a picture associated with the winning result on the display screen (display screen G) in a static manner to indicate that the determination result is the winning result. and
The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the special notification means is configured to execute the special notification using the symbol.

As shown in this feature, by making a special notification using the picture used in the winning presentation, it is possible to provide a correlation between the winning presentation and the special presentation, and to construct an integrated presentation.

Feature B5. According to feature B3 or feature B4, the special notification means includes means for determining special information to be targeted when the winning result is shown by the winning performance means. gaming machines.

By determining the specific target when the winning result is shown by the winning performance, it is possible to shift to the special notification without delay.

Feature B6. When the winning effect is shown by the winning performance means, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches a specified number, which is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means. comprising a firing suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the starting ball entry part based on the fact that the game ball has not reached the starting ball entry part;
The special notification means is configured to specify how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included after the suggestion by the firing suggestion means and execute the special notification. The gaming machine according to any one of B3 to B5.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the number of special information stored when special notification is executed is suppressed from becoming extremely small, and it becomes easy to increase the number of special information to the specified number. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience that the effects shown in feature B1 etc. cannot be effectively achieved due to lack of special information.

Feature B7. The special notification means determines whether the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches a specified number, which is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, by a preset determination timing. In the gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, if there is no such information, the identification is performed using special information stored up to the determination timing.

There is a limit to the execution period of a predetermined game round. Therefore, if the number of special information stored in the special information storage means does not reach the specified number by the preset determination timing, the special information stored by the determination timing is targeted for the specified By doing so, it is possible to suitably avoid pressure on the execution period of the special notification.

Feature B8. The special notification means determines whether the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches a specified number, which is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, by a preset determination timing. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the special notification is not performed if there is no special notification.

If the number of stored special information does not reach the specified number, a configuration is adopted in which special notification is not performed, so that it is possible to suitably avoid a decrease in reliability of the special notification.

Feature B9. When the winning effect is shown by the winning performance means, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches a specified number, which is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means. comprising a firing suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the starting ball entry part based on the fact that the game ball has not reached the starting ball entry part;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B8, wherein the firing suggestion means is configured not to make the suggestion during the special notification.

According to the configuration shown in feature B9, it is possible to reduce the chance that the ball enters the starting ball entry section and then the special information is acquired during the special notification. This is preferable in order to suppress the occurrence of a discrepancy between the number of actual winning results and the number of times indicated by the special notification due to new special information being added during the special notification.

Feature B10. Comprising a game round performance execution means (symbol display device 41 and notification/performance control device 82) that executes a game round performance in parallel with the game round operation,
The game round performance executing means is a winning performance means that executes a winning performance indicating that the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result before the game round operation ends in the predetermined game round. (Function to execute stop display of "V" symbol combination in MPU 242 of notification/performance control device 82),
Feature B1 or Feature B2, characterized in that the special notification means is configured to execute the special notification at a timing when the winning performance is indicated by the winning performance by the winning performance unit. The gaming machine described in .

As shown in this feature, by configuring the special notification to be executed at the same timing as the winning result is shown, the impact of a predetermined game round can be strengthened.

Feature B11. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine that has
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined game states include a first game state (for example, a normal game state or a third special game state) and a second game state (for example, a second special game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. has been
If the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in the second gaming state, the subsequent special stored in the special information storage means A special notification means (such as a display of "V x 7") that specifies how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the information and executes a special notification (display of "V x 7", etc.) based on the specified result during the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing a winning number suggesting performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82.

In the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means It is specified how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included, and a special notification based on the specified result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the player is also notified of how many winning results are waiting to be played, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that goes beyond simply winning a winning result. be able to. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that the description ``a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state'' has been replaced with ``a second gaming state in which the determination result by the special information determining means is more likely to result in the winning result than the first gaming state''. ” It is also possible.

Feature B12. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine that has
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The judgment result by the special information judgment means becomes the first result, which is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special judgment information, and the game turn control means causes the game turn to be announced as a notification result corresponding to the first result. A first special game state transition means (main) for shifting the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the completion of the operation; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a special winning game state in the MPU 112 of the control device 81);
If a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or a second game where the determination result by the special information determining means is a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. A second special game state transition means (of the main control device 81) that causes the game time to shift to a second special game state when the game time control means ends the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the second result. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 (a function of causing the MPU 112 to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened);
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Specify how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the subsequent special information that has been displayed, and make a special notification (display of "V x 7", etc.) based on the specified result during the specified game round. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a special notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggesting performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82).

In the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round (last game round) in the second game state on the advantageous side, if the determination result by the special information determining means is a winning result, it is stored in the special information storage means. It is specified how many pieces of special information corresponding to the winning result are included in the subsequent special information, and a special notification based on the specified result is executed during the predetermined game round. In other words, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the player is also notified of how many winning results are waiting to be played, giving the player a sense of satisfaction that goes beyond simply winning a winning result. be able to. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that the technical ideas shown in Features B3 to B10 may be applied to Features B11 to B12.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature A group to the features B1 to B12 detailed above.

<Feature C group>
The following characteristic group C is defined as: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a firing operation by a player. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine that has
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened,
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, calculate the number of times the winning result will occur in a plurality of game rounds, including game rounds related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. Estimating means for estimating (a function that executes the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82),
It is characterized by comprising an estimation result notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggestion performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82) that reports the estimation result by the estimation means before the start of the next game round. A gaming machine that does.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means With reference to the information, the number of winning results is estimated in a plurality of game times including game times related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. Then, the estimation result will be notified by the estimation result notification means before the next game round is started. With such a configuration, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the system will also inform you of how many winning results are waiting to be played, which will give you more satisfaction than just a winning result. It is possible to give a feeling to the player. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein a maximum value of the number of winning results estimated by the estimating means is larger than an upper limit of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means.

According to feature C2, the estimation result reporting means may report the number of special information exceeding the storage upper limit, so the impact when the notification is performed is extremely large. This is advantageous in terms of increasing attention to the game.

Feature C3. The estimating means is configured to estimate the number of times during the predetermined game round that the winning result including the winning result in the predetermined game round is obtained,
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein the estimation result notification means is configured to notify the estimation result during the predetermined game round.

As shown in feature C3, by having a configuration in which the estimation results are reported during a predetermined game round, and a configuration in which the estimation results include the winning results in the predetermined game rounds, the impact and appearance of the notified estimation results can be optimized. can be improved.

Feature C4. If the number of special information stored in the special information storage means does not reach the reference number, the estimation means does not perform the estimation or the estimation result notification means does not notify. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3.

In the configuration shown in feature C1 etc., if the number of stored special information is reduced, it means that there are fewer guessing factors for guessing how the branching such as the destination of the gaming state will proceed. There are concerns that the reliability of notifications will be lowered, or that the impact of notifications will be weakened as the number of winning results to be notified is underestimated. In view of these circumstances, a configuration in which estimation or notification of estimation results is avoided when the number of stored special information has not reached the standard number (for example, the upper limit of storage number) would avoid the above-mentioned disadvantages. There is a technical significance in that it can suppress the occurrence.

Feature C5. In the predetermined game round, the game apparatus further includes a firing suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the starting ball entry part before the estimation by the estimation means is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C4.

As described above, it is preferable to increase the number of stored special information as much as possible in order to increase the impact and reliability of the estimation results to be reported. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that a firing suggestion to the starting ball entry section is made before estimation, it is possible to increase the number of special information that can be referenced at the time of estimation.

Feature C6. When the predetermined game is played again in a situation where the estimation result is reported by the estimation result notification means, the estimation result being reported can be updated based on the new estimation result by the estimation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that:

According to feature C5, the expected winning results continue seamlessly, giving the player a sense of security and dramatically increasing the player's satisfaction.

Feature C7. A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the second switching mode,
During the second gaming state, the determination result by the special information determining means becomes the winning result, and the number of consecutive games (number of consecutive games) that results in the winning result without shifting to the first gaming state is a specified number of times (for example, 4 a first transition means (a function that causes the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 to transition to the third special gaming state by a limiter operation) for transitioning to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when
If the winning result is obtained during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times the winning result is obtained without transitioning to the first gaming state does not reach the specified number of times, the second gaming state is executed after the special gaming state ends. A second transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (a function for transitioning to the second special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81),
When the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result, the gaming state to which the special gaming state is to be transitioned to after the end of the special gaming state and the relevant game, depending on the gaming state in which the winning result is obtained. The configuration is such that at least one of the number of games maintained in the state is different,
The estimation means is
state estimating means for estimating the transition of the gaming state after all the gaming rounds related to the special information stored in the special information storage means have been executed;
a remaining number of times calculation means for calculating the remaining number of times until the specified number of times is reached after all the game times related to the special information stored in the special information storage means have been played;
Based on the transition of the gaming state estimated by the state estimating means and the remaining number of times calculated by the remaining number of times calculating means, the number of game times related to each special information stored in the special information storage means and the remaining number of game times are determined. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to estimate the number of times the winning result is obtained in the gaming times related to the special information that is not included.

As shown in this feature, the game number associated with each special information stored in the special information storage means is based on the transition of the game state estimated by the state estimating means and the remaining number of times calculated by the remaining number of times calculation means. By configuring the configuration to estimate the number of times that a winning result is obtained between the game game and the game game related to the special information that has not yet been stored, the estimation function shown in feature C1 etc. can be suitably realized.

Feature C8. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state during time saving,
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, calculate the number of times the winning result will occur in a plurality of game rounds, including game rounds related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. Estimating means for estimating (a function that executes the process of calculating the number of consecutive wins in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82);
It is characterized by comprising an estimation result notification means (a function of executing a winning number suggesting performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82) that reports the estimation result by the estimation means before the start of the next game round. A gaming machine that does.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means With reference to the information, the number of winning results is estimated in a plurality of game times including game times related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. Then, the estimation result will be notified by the estimation result notification means before the next game round is started. With such a configuration, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game round, the system will also inform you of how many winning results are waiting to be played, which will give you more satisfaction than just a winning result. It is possible to give a feeling to the player. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Feature C9. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine that has
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state during time saving,
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, calculate the number of times the winning result will occur in a plurality of game rounds, including game rounds related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a suggestion means (a function of executing a winning number suggestion performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82) to suggest to the player.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means By referring to the information, the number of winning results in multiple game rounds, including the game rounds related to each stored special information and the game rounds related to special information that has not yet been stored, is determined in the next game round. This will be suggested to the player before the game starts. With such a configuration, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game, it will also indicate how many more winning results are waiting, so the customer will be more satisfied than just the winning result. It is possible to give a feeling to the player. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Feature C10. It includes a game board (game board unit 80B) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 110) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entering section (operating ball entering section 90) that is provided in the gaming area (gaming area PE) and into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determination means (the MPU 402 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) that determines whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to the special determination information (winning information). function) and
Prior to the judgment by the special information judgment means or based on the judgment made by the special information judgment means, the game repeat operation (picture display) is started, and the notification result corresponding to the result of the judgment is The notification means (for the actuating mouth) is set so that the completion of the game round operation is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the special information storage means. a game time control means (a function for executing display control of the operating opening display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The judgment result by the special information judgment means becomes the first result, which is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special judgment information, and the game turn control means causes the game turn to be announced as a notification result corresponding to the first result. A first special game state transition means (main) for shifting the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the completion of the operation; (a function of executing processing for transition to a special winning game state in the MPU 112 of the control device 81);
If a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or a second game where the determination result by the special information determining means is a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. A second special game state transition means (of the main control device 81) that causes the game time to shift to a second special game state when the game time control means ends the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the second result. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first game state transition means (main controller 81 The MPU 112 has a function of shifting from the first special game state to the third special game state during time saving,
In the case where the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, storing it in the special information storage means. Based on each special information that has been stored, calculate the number of times the winning result will occur in multiple game rounds, including game rounds related to each stored special information and game times related to special information that has not yet been stored. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a suggestion means (a function of executing a winning number suggestion performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82) to suggest to the player.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in a predetermined game round in the second gaming state on the advantageous side, when the determination result by the special information determination means is a winning result, the subsequent special information stored in the special information storage means By referring to the information, the number of winning results in multiple game rounds, including the game rounds related to each stored special information and the game rounds related to special information that has not yet been stored, is determined in the next game round. This will be suggested to the player before the game starts. With such a configuration, if a winning result is obtained in a predetermined game, it will also indicate how many more winning results are waiting, so the customer will be more satisfied than just the winning result. It is possible to give a feeling to the player. By providing such innovative result notifications, the attention to the game can be dramatically increased.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features C2 to C7 may be applied to the features C8 to C10.

Furthermore, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in Feature A Group to Feature B Group to Features C1 to C10 detailed above.

<Characteristic group D>
The following feature group D is defined as ``a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that launches game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 (a function of causing the MPU 112 to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened);
A winning effect for executing a winning effect when the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. A performance execution means (a function for executing a stop display of the “V” symbol combination and a winning number suggestion performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82),
Executing a non-winning performance for executing a non-winning performance when the determination result by the special information determining means is a non-winning result (losing result) in the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. means (a function to stop display the "failure" symbol and execute introduction performances A and B in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82),
As the non-winning performance, a plurality of non-winning performances with different presentation modes are provided,
The non-winning performance execution means is a performance mode determining unit that determines a non-winning performance to be executed among the plurality of non-winning performances based on the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

According to feature D1, when the last game round in the second gaming state corresponds to a non-winning result, the mode of the non-winning performance is changed according to the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. It will be different. In this way, by having a configuration in which the performance mode of the final game round in the second game state changes depending on the state of ball entry into the starting ball entry section in the second game state, it contributes to improving the degree of attention to the final game round. can.

Feature D2. The plurality of non-winning performances include a first performance and a second performance,
The performance mode determining means determines the first performance as the execution target when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has reached the upper limit, and the performance mode determining means determines the first performance as the execution target, The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to determine the second performance as the execution target when the number of special information included in the game does not reach an upper limit.

As shown in feature D2, the effects shown in feature D1 can be suitably exhibited by varying the presentation mode depending on whether or not at least the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit.

Feature D3. A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The first gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode is the first switching mode,
The gaming machine according to feature D2, wherein the second gaming state is a gaming state in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode.

As shown in this feature, by making the second game state correspond to the second switching mode and making it easier for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, the performance mode is made different depending on whether or not the upper limit shown in feature D2 is reached. It is possible to suitably avoid the inability to perform functions properly.

Feature D4. In the predetermined game play in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state, the game play performance that is executed in parallel with the predetermined game play is the first game effect that is executed before the notification of the determination result by the special information determination means. It consists of the first part and the second part, which is executed after notification of the determination result.
The winning performance execution means executes the winning performance as a performance in the second part, and the non-winning performance execution means executes the non-winning performance as a performance in the second part. ,
Any one of features D1 to D3, characterized in that the performance mode determining means is configured to determine a non-winning performance to be executed during the first part or when transitioning to the second part. The gaming machine described in item 1.

As shown in this feature, when a predetermined game round is composed of two parts, the first part and the second part, special information is stored that stores the performance mode of the non-winning performance in the second part after the result is announced. By having a configuration that differs depending on the number of results, it is possible to suitably prevent the performance from becoming monotonous even after the results are announced.

Feature D5. When transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The structure is such that the more special information carried over, the more advantageous the player will be.
The plurality of non-winning performances include a first performance and a second performance,
The performance mode determining means determines the first performance as the execution target when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has reached the upper limit, and the performance mode determining means determines the first performance as the execution target, If the number of special information included has not reached the upper limit, the second effect is determined as the execution target,
The second performance includes the display of an image that suggests to the player that the game ball should be launched toward the starting ball entry part, and the first performance does not include the display of the image that suggests the player. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4.

According to feature D5, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, it is configured such that the more special information carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. There is. In such a configuration, after a non-winning result is announced, the number of special information items can be increased to the upper limit by the end of the game round, thereby making it possible to proceed with the game advantageously. Therefore, in the second performance, a practically preferable configuration can be realized by suppressing the disadvantage to the player by including a display of an image that suggests to the player that the game ball should be fired toward the starting ball entry part. .

Feature D6. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information related to the operation port in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (retention information related to the operation port) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section; ,
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Special information determining means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, winning information) (the MPU 112 of the main controller 81 executes a validity determination process, etc.) function) and
A special system for shifting to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than a predetermined gaming state when the judgment result by the special information judgment means is a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special judgment information. A game state transition means (a function for executing transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81),
A second switch that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the ball, and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the ball than in the receiving state. 1 variable ball entry part (second variable winning device 32B),
A first switching means for switching the first variable ball entry section between the non-accepting state and the accepting state (a function that controls opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
A second switch that can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the ball, and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the ball than in the receiving state. 2 variable ball entry part (first variable winning device 32A),
a second switching means for switching the second variable ball entry section between the non-accepting state and the accepting state (a function for controlling opening and closing of the first variable winning device 32A by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The special determination information includes first determination information (numeric information that results in a special hit) and second determination information (numeric information that results in a jackpot),
The first switching means is configured to control the first switching means when the judgment result by the judgment means is a first judgment result (special winning result) that corresponds to the first judgment information and the state shifts to the special gaming state. The variable ball entry section is configured to switch to the receiving state,
The second switching means determines whether the judgment result by the judgment means is a second judgment result (jackpot result) that corresponds to the second judgment information and the transition to the special gaming state occurs; If the determination result is that the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the first variable ball entry part, the second variable ball entry part is switched to the receiving state,
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (second special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. A special game state) is provided.
The starting ball entry section and the second variable ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the game area,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 (a function of causing the MPU 112 to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened);
and firing suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the predetermined flow path when the second gaming state is in place,
The firing suggestion means executes a first suggestion as the suggestion when the judgment result by the special information judgment means in the predetermined game round in the second game state is the first judgment result, and The gaming machine is characterized in that the second suggestion is executed as the suggestion when the judgment result by the special information judgment means is a non-winning result (losing result) in the predetermined game round in the state.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the first determination result is obtained in the second gaming state, the ball can enter the first variable ball entry section, and a predetermined area (V winning area) in the first variable ball entry section is enabled. ), it becomes possible for the ball to enter the second variable ball entry section. In other words, in order to advance the game advantageously, it is necessary to launch the game ball toward the first variable ball entry section after the second game state ends. On the other hand, if the second gaming state ends without a winning result, the second gaming state shifts to the first gaming state. In the first game state, it is impossible or difficult for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, so the game proceeds based on the special information carried over from the second game state. In other words, in order to proceed with the game in the first game state, it is necessary to secure special information in advance, and by securing as much special information as possible (preferably up to the upper limit), it is possible to make the game advantageous. You can proceed. Here, in this feature, if the first determination result (winning result) is obtained in the final game round in the second gaming state, the first suggestion is executed, and the first suggestion is executed in the final game round in the second gaming state. If the result is a winning result, the second suggestion is executed. With such a configuration, by encouraging the ball to enter the starting ball entry part and the first variable ball entry part (predetermined area), the game becomes complicated and the player is unable to enjoy the benefits that he or she could originally enjoy. can be suitably avoided. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the games by diversifying the games.

Feature D7. The firing suggestion means stores the information in the special information storage means when the determination result by the special information determination means in the predetermined game round in the second game state is a non-winning result (losing result). The second suggestion is executed when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached a prescribed number that is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means,
In the case where the determination result by the special information determination means in the predetermined game round in the second gaming state is a non-winning result (losing result), and the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is The gaming machine according to feature D6, further comprising special performance execution means for executing a special performance in place of the second suggestion when the specified number reaches an upper limit.

If the result is a non-winning result in a predetermined game, there is a possibility that the number of stored special information has reached its upper limit. In such a case, the player's satisfaction level can be suitably increased by executing a special effect instead of the second suggestion.

Feature D8. The firing suggestion means is configured such that the suggestion start timing when executing the second suggestion in the predetermined game round is earlier than the suggestion start timing when executing the first suggestion in the predetermined game round. The gaming machine according to feature D6 or feature D7.

As shown in this feature, by making the start timing of the suggestion earlier when the non-winning result becomes the second gaming state, and delaying the timing of the suggestion when the first judgment result becomes the special gaming state, it is possible to It is possible to suitably prevent players from missing out on benefits that they should have been able to enjoy, while reducing the number of players.

Feature D9. The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D8, wherein the maximum execution period of the second suggestion is configured to be longer than the maximum execution period of the first suggestion.

As shown in this feature, by differentiating so that the maximum execution period of the second suggestion is longer than the maximum execution period of the first suggestion, it is possible to reduce wasted balls and miss out on the benefits that the player should have been able to enjoy. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature D10. The firing suggestion means continues the first suggestion even after the second gaming state ends when the first suggestion is executed, and continues the first suggestion when the second suggestion is executed. 2. If the number of special information stored in the special information storage means during the gaming state reaches a specified number which is the upper limit number of special information that can be stored by the special information storage means, or the number of special information The gaming machine according to any one of features D6 to D9, characterized in that the second suggestion is ended when the second gaming state ends without reaching a specified number.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the technical idea shown in feature D6 can be suitably realized.

Feature D11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
a first gaming state transition means (main controller 81 (a function of causing the MPU 112 to shift from the first special game state to the third special game state when time is shortened);
A winning effect for executing a winning effect when the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in a predetermined game round (for example, the first game round) in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. A performance execution means (a function for executing a stop display of the “V” symbol combination and a winning number suggestion performance in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82),
Executing a non-winning performance for executing a non-winning performance when the determination result by the special information determining means is a non-winning result (losing result) in the predetermined game round in which the predetermined number of times is reached in the second gaming state. means (a function to stop display the "failure" symbol and execute introduction performances A and B in the MPU 242 of the notification/performance control device 82),
As the non-winning performance, a plurality of non-winning performances with different presentation modes are provided,
The non-winning performance execution means is a performance mode determining unit that determines a non-winning performance to be executed among the plurality of non-winning performances based on the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

According to feature D11, when the last game round in the second gaming state corresponds to a non-winning result, the mode of the non-winning performance is changed according to the number of special information stored in the special information storage means. It will be different. In this way, by having a configuration in which the performance mode of the final game round in the second game state changes depending on the state of ball entry into the starting ball entry section in the second game state, it contributes to improving the degree of attention to the final game round. can.

Note that each of the technical ideas shown in features D2 to D5 may be applied to feature D11.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to C to the features D1 to D11 detailed above.

<Characteristic group E>
The following feature group E is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that shoots game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first transition means (main controller 81) that shifts the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special gaming state) to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. A function for executing transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (first special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. A special game state) is provided.
In the second gaming state, the result of the determination by the special information determining means is a non-winning result (losing result), and the game round operation is ended by the game round control means as a notification result corresponding to the non-winning result. a second transition means (a function for executing processing for transition to the first special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the above;
A special performance execution means (notification/performance) that starts a special performance (challenge performance) upon transition to the second gaming state, and ends the special performance when the game repetition operation in the second gaming state ends. A function for executing processing for challenge production in the MPU 242 of the control device 82),
In the first gaming state, the game repetition operation is executed by the game repetition control means based on the remaining special information acquired during the second gaming state,
The special performance execution means is
Part transition means for shifting the special performance from the first part to the second part when the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is started in the second gaming state;
The second part includes advance notification means for advance notification of the determination result by the special information determination means prior to the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means,
a first suggestion means that suggests to the player to fire a game ball toward the starting ball entry section when transitioning to the second gaming state;
It is characterized by comprising a second suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the starting ball entry part during the remaining period of the game repetition operation after the advance notice by the advance notice means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature E1, in the second game state corresponding to the second switching mode, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry section. A special performance is started with the transition to the second game state, and when the game ball fired according to the suggestion by the first suggestion means enters the starting ball entry section, the game circulation operation is started and the special performance transitions from the first part to the second part. Thereafter, the determination result is notified in advance prior to the end of the game repeat operation. After the advance notification, the second suggestion means suggests firing the game ball toward the starting ball entry section, and special information can be acquired and stored by firing the game ball according to the suggestion. After transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, a gaming round will be executed based on the special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state, but the second suggestion means will cause the first The lack of special information for gaming conditions can be suitably suppressed. If the configuration is such that an opportunity to obtain special information is secured after the advance notification of the result, the player can concentrate on the performance in the second part of the special performance until the result is notified. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game while realizing the prompt progress of the special performance for advanced notification (while reducing the waiting time for the performance to proceed).

Feature E2. The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the first suggestion means terminates the suggestion by the first suggestion means when at least one ball enters the starting ball entry section.

According to feature E2, in order to advance the special performance (start the game repeat operation), it is sufficient if at least one piece of special information is acquired after transition to the second gaming state. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the suggestion is terminated when at least one ball enters the starting ball entry section, the effect shown in feature E1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature E3. The second suggestion means has means for terminating the suggestion by the second suggestion means when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches an upper limit of storage by the special information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2.

As shown in feature E3, by configuring the suggestion by the second suggestion means to end when the number of special information reaches the upper limit, the player's attention is directed from the movement of the game ball to the starting ball part. It is possible to prompt the user to promptly return to the special performance. This is preferable in order to suitably exhibit the effect of improving the attention level by the special performance.

Feature E4. The first suggestion means is configured such that the first suggestion means does not make the suggestion if special information stored in the special information storage means exists when transitioning to the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

As shown in feature E4, if the special information has already been acquired at the time of transition to the second gaming state, no suggestion is made, thereby suitably realizing a configuration that does not disturb the player's concentration on the special performance. can.

Feature E5. The special performance execution means is configured to perform the advance notification so that a period from the advance notification to the end of the special performance is longer than a period from the start of the second part of the special performance to the advance notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that timing is defined.

According to the configuration shown in feature E5, it is possible to secure a long grace period when acquiring special information after advance notification is executed in a special performance. This is preferable in order to prevent a transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state without being able to acquire special information up to the storage limit due to lack of grace period.

Feature E6. comprising a third transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state after the end of the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the suggestion by the first suggestion means is executed across the special gaming state and the second gaming state.

According to feature E6, by making a suggestion for the second game state from the special game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry part after the state transition (after switching to the second switching mode), that is, from the first part. It is possible to quickly move on to the second part. This is preferable in order to suppress elongation of the first part.

Feature E7. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the suggestion by the second suggestion means is more emphasized than the suggestion by the first suggestion means.

In a configuration in which a game round in the second game state is started by the ball entering the starting ball entry section, there is no substantial disadvantage to the player even if the timing of the ball entry is somewhat delayed. On the other hand, if sufficient special information cannot be acquired during the second gaming state (the second half of the gaming session), fewer gaming sessions will be executed after the transition to the first gaming mode, and the player may be disadvantaged. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by emphasizing the suggestion by the second suggestion means more than the suggestion by the first suggestion means. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine due to the complexity of the game.

Feature E8. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. A function for executing processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in the MPU 112);
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (first special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. A special game state) is provided.
In the second gaming state, the result of the determination by the special information determining means is a non-winning result (losing result), and the game round operation is ended by the game round control means as a notification result corresponding to the non-winning result. a second transition means (a function for executing processing for transition to the first special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) for shifting the gaming state to the first gaming state based on the above;
A special performance execution means (notification/performance) that starts a special performance (challenge performance) upon transition to the second gaming state, and ends the special performance when the game repetition operation in the second gaming state ends. A function for executing processing for challenge production in the MPU 242 of the control device 82),
In the first gaming state, the game repetition operation is executed by the game repetition control means based on the remaining special information acquired during the second gaming state,
The special performance execution means is
Part transition means for shifting the special performance from the first part to the second part when the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means is started in the second gaming state;
The second part includes advance notification means for advance notification of the determination result by the special information determination means prior to the completion of the game repetition operation by the game time control means,
a first suggestion means that suggests to the player to fire a game ball toward the starting ball entry section when transitioning to the second gaming state;
It is characterized by comprising a second suggestion means for suggesting to the player to fire the game ball toward the starting ball entry part during the remaining period of the game repetition operation after the advance notice by the advance notice means. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature E8, in the second game state corresponding to the second switching mode, it becomes easy to enter the ball into the starting ball entry section. A special performance is started with the transition to the second game state, and when the game ball fired according to the suggestion by the first suggestion means enters the starting ball entry section, the game circulation operation is started and the special performance transitions from the first part to the second part. Thereafter, the determination result is notified in advance prior to the end of the game repeat operation. After the advance notification, the second suggestion means suggests firing the game ball toward the starting ball entry section, and special information can be acquired and stored by firing the game ball according to the suggestion. After transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, a gaming round will be executed based on the special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state, but the second suggestion means will cause the first The lack of special information for gaming conditions can be suitably suppressed. If the configuration is such that an opportunity to obtain special information is secured after the advance notification of the result, the player can concentrate on the performance in the second part of the special performance until the result is notified. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game while realizing the prompt progress of the special performance for advanced notification (while reducing the waiting time for the performance to proceed).

Note that each of the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E7 may be applied to the feature E8.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to D to the features E1 to E8 detailed above.

<Characteristic group F>
The following feature group F is based on the following: ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball firing means that fires game balls into the game area based on a player's firing operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (For example, see Patent Document 1).'' Regarding the background art that ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done based on the problem it was trying to solve.

Feature F1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state is the winning result, the configuration allows the transition to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state (whether or not a limiter is activated); has become,
When transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The structure is such that the more special information carried over, the more advantageous the player will be.
At least in the second game state, a firing suggestion means (for example, in the MPU 242 of the symbol display device 41 or the notification/performance control device 82 function to execute processing for right-handed hit notification),
In a game round that is executed in the second gaming state and in which the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result, the number of special information stored in the special information storing means is determined by the special information storing means. It is provided with an emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the firing suggestion means when the memorizable upper limit has not been reached (a function of executing a process for emphasizing the right-hand hit notice in the MPU 242 of the notice/performance control device 82). A gaming machine featuring:

In the configuration shown in feature F1, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state that is transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state It is configured such that the more special information is carried over, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. In the second game state, since the game state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the game repeating motions and effects performed during the game play, and the attention is directed to the starting ball entry part. I think it will decline. Here, in the second gaming state, if the result is a winning result, the player can shift to the first gaming state, so if the player's attention remains on the performance and the acquisition of special information is neglected, the player's There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you could have obtained. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in a game round that results in a winning result in the second game state, if the number of stored special information has not reached the upper limit, the suggestion by the firing suggestion means is emphasized. In this way, by configuring the system to prompt the player to acquire special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to a shortage of special information when transitioning to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Feature F2. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first transition means (main controller 81) that shifts the gaming state from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state or a special gaming state) to a special gaming state (opening/closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. A function for executing transition processing to the opening/closing execution mode in the MPU 112 of
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (second special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. A special game state) is provided.
If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state is the winning result, the first gaming state may be entered after the special gaming state ends;
A firing suggestion means that suggests to the player to fire a game ball toward the starting ball entry section when at least the second gaming state is in place;
In the game round executed in the second gaming state and resulting in the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means does not reach the upper limit that can be stored by the special information storage means. and emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the firing suggestion means.

In the configuration shown in feature F2, the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the first switching mode with the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, making it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section. becomes. In such a configuration, the more special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state that is carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. In the second game state, since the game state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the game repeating motions and effects performed during the game play, and the attention is directed to the starting ball entry part. I think it will decline. Here, in the second gaming state, if the result is a winning result, the player can shift to the first gaming state, so if the player's attention remains on the performance and the acquisition of special information is neglected, the player's There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you could have obtained. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in a game round that results in a winning result in the second game state, if the number of stored special information has not reached the upper limit, the suggestion by the firing suggestion means is emphasized. In this way, by configuring the system to prompt the player to acquire special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to a shortage of special information when transitioning to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Feature F3. During the second gaming state, the determination result by the special information determining means becomes the winning result, and the number of consecutive games (number of consecutive games) that results in the winning result without shifting to the first gaming state is a specified number of times (for example, 4 a first transition means (a function that causes the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 to transition to the third special gaming state by a limiter operation) for transitioning to the first gaming state after the end of the special gaming state when
If the winning result is obtained during the second gaming state and the number of consecutive times the winning result is obtained without transitioning to the first gaming state does not reach the specified number of times, the second gaming state is executed after the special gaming state ends. A second transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (a function for transitioning to the second special gaming state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81),
The emphasizing means is stored in the special information storage means under a situation where a game replay operation is being performed for a game round in which the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in the second gaming state. The present invention is characterized by comprising means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means when the number of special information provided reaches the upper limit and when the consecutive number of times including the winning result reaches the specified number of times. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2.

In the configuration (so-called limiter) that controls the consecutive number of times as shown in feature F3, the player's desire to play may decrease because the player is forced to shift to the first gaming state when the specified number of times is reached. At this time, if a situation arises in which the player cannot enjoy the benefits that he or she is supposed to get due to lack of special information, as shown in feature F1, etc., there is a concern that the player's desire to play will decrease significantly. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by emphasizing the suggestion by the firing suggestion means at least under conditions where the limiter can be activated.

Feature F4. The emphasizing means is stored in the special information storage means under a situation where a game replay operation is being performed for a game round in which the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in the second gaming state. means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means when the number of special information provided reaches the upper limit and the consecutive number of times including the winning result does not reach the specified number;
As the emphasis mode by the emphasis means, a first emphasis mode (right-handed player notification LV1) and a second emphasis mode (right-handed player notification LV2) that is more noticeable than the first emphasis mode are provided,
The emphasizing means sets a mode of emphasizing the suggestion by the suggesting means when the number of consecutive times reaches the predetermined number as the second emphasizing mode, and a mode of emphasizing the suggestion by the suggesting means when the number of consecutive times does not reach the predetermined number of times. The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the gaming machine is configured so that the emphasis mode of the suggestion is the first emphasis mode.

Since the second gaming state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention tends to be directed toward the performance. Here, there is a concern that excessive emphasis on the suggestion by the above-mentioned firing suggestion means will increase the possibility that the suggestion will give the impression to the player that it is a nuisance. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the suggestion by the firing suggestion means is emphasized in the first emphasis mode when the limiter is not activated and in the second emphasis mode when the limiter is activated, it is possible to suitably reduce the negative impression of the emphasis function. It can be wiped away.

Feature F5. In the second gaming state, the emphasis by the emphasis means is disabled until a predetermined period (predetermined grace period) elapses after the game repetition operation by the game time control means is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4.

At the start of a game round (game round operation), the special information (pending) stored in the special information storage means is reduced. In other words, the number of stored special information is always less than the upper limit. There is a concern that emphasizing the suggestion each time will cause the suggestion to be emphasized frequently, increasing the possibility of giving the impression that it is bothersome to the player. In this regard, as shown in this feature, by providing a grace period during which emphasis is not possible after the start of a game round, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F6. The gaming machine according to feature F5, further comprising period variable means for varying the length of the predetermined period.

According to feature F6, the predetermined period (the period during which emphasis is disabled) can be varied depending on the gaming situation and the like. As a result, the emphasis function can be activated in accordance with the gaming situation and the like. For example, if the execution period of the game repeat operation is short, the predetermined period may be shortened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the emphasis period from becoming too short and the emphasis function not being able to function properly.

Feature F7. The period variable means has means for shortening the predetermined period when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means is less than a predetermined number when the game repeat operation is started. The gaming machine according to feature F6.

According to feature F7, by configuring the system so that the less special information is stored at the start of a game round, the suggestion is emphasized earlier, it is possible to suitably suppress the lack of time for acquiring special information. .

Feature F8. When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit in a situation where the suggestion is emphasized by the emphasizing means, the emphasis on the suggestion is canceled. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F7.

If the emphasis function shown in feature F1 etc. is provided, as shown in this feature, a practically preferable configuration can be achieved by canceling the emphasis when the number of special information reaches the upper limit after highlighting the suggestion. realizable.

Feature F9. The emphasizing means is configured to display the special information storage means in a situation where a game repetition operation is being performed for a game round in which the determination result by the special information determination means is a non-winning result (losing result) in the second gaming state. Any one of features F1 to F8, characterized in that the method further includes means for emphasizing the suggestion by the suggestion means in a part of the case where the number of special information stored in the storage device does not reach the upper limit. The gaming machine described in .

In the configuration shown in feature F1 etc., there is a concern that the occurrence of emphasis = winning result will reduce the performance effects of other performances executed during the game round. Therefore, by creating a configuration in which suggestions can be emphasized in some cases where the number of special information is insufficient even in game rounds that result in a non-winning result, even if the emphasis occurs, the suggestion will be a winning result and a non-winning result. Both cases will result in a winning result. Even if such fake emphasis is performed, the player will not be disadvantaged. For the above reasons, we believe that the configuration shown in this feature is a preferable configuration in order to increase the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F10. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller The MPU 112 of 81 executes the transition process to the opening/closing execution mode) and the determination result by the special information determination means becomes the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game time control means determines the winning result (special winning result). As a notification result corresponding to the winning result, the gaming state is changed from a predetermined gaming state to a first special gaming state (special winning gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state based on the completion of the game repeat operation. A first special game state transition means (a function for executing processing for transition to the special winning game state in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state is the winning result, the configuration is such that the first gaming state can be entered after the special gaming state ends (with or without limiter operation). and
When transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state is transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. The structure is such that the more special information carried over, the more advantageous the player will be.
At least in the second game state, a firing suggestion means (for example, in the MPU 242 of the symbol display device 41 or the notification/performance control device 82 function to execute processing for right-handed hit notification),
In a game round that is executed in the second gaming state and in which the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result, the number of special information stored in the special information storing means is determined by the special information storing means. It is provided with an emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the firing suggestion means when the memorizable upper limit has not been reached (a function of executing a process for emphasizing the right-hand hit notice in the MPU 242 of the notice/performance control device 82). A gaming machine featuring:

In the configuration shown in feature F10, when transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state and transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state It is configured such that the more special information is carried over, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. Here, in the second gaming state, if a winning result is obtained, the game will shift to the first gaming state. In the second game state, since the game state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the game repeating motions and effects performed during the game play, and the attention is directed to the starting ball entry part. I think it will decline. Here, in the second gaming state, if the result is a winning result, the player can shift to the first gaming state, so if the player's attention remains on the performance and the acquisition of special information is neglected, the player's There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you could have obtained. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in a game round that results in a winning result in the second game state, if the number of stored special information has not reached the upper limit, the suggestion by the firing suggestion means is emphasized. In this way, by configuring the system to prompt the player to acquire special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to a shortage of special information when transitioning to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Feature F11. It is equipped with a game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) in which game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the entry of the ball into the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function for storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, winning information of a jackpot or special win). function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state in the MPU 112);
A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (third special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the first switching mode, and a second gaming state (first special gaming state) in which the switching control mode becomes the second switching mode. A special game state) is provided.
If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state is the winning result, the first gaming state may be entered after the special gaming state ends;
A firing suggestion means that suggests to the player to fire a game ball toward the starting ball entry section when at least the second gaming state is in place;
In the game round executed in the second gaming state and resulting in the winning result, the number of the special information stored in the special information storage means does not reach the upper limit that can be stored by the special information storage means. and emphasizing means for emphasizing the suggestion by the firing suggestion means.

In the configuration shown in feature F11, the switching control mode switches from the second switching mode to the first switching mode with the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, making it difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section. becomes. In such a configuration, the more special information acquired and stored during the second gaming state that is carried over from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, the more advantageous it becomes to the player. In the second game state, since the game state is advantageous to the player, the player's attention is more likely to be directed to the game repeating motions and effects performed during the game play, and the attention is directed to the starting ball entry part. I think it will decline. Here, in the second gaming state, if the result is a winning result, the player can shift to the first gaming state, so if the player's attention remains on the performance and the acquisition of special information is neglected, the player's There is a high possibility that you will not be able to enjoy the benefits that you could have obtained. This is not preferable in terms of increasing attention to the game. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in a game round that results in a winning result in the second game state, if the number of stored special information has not reached the upper limit, the suggestion by the firing suggestion means is emphasized. In this way, by configuring the system to prompt the player to acquire special information, it is possible to prevent the player from being at a disadvantage due to a shortage of special information when transitioning to the first gaming state. This is preferable in order to increase the degree of attention to the above-mentioned effects and the like.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F9 may be applied to the features F10 to F11.

Furthermore, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to E to the features F1 to F11 detailed above.

<Feature G group>
The following characteristic group G is defined as ``A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launcher that launches game balls into the game area based on a player's launch operation. When the game balls fired from the game ball launching means enter the ball entry section provided in the game area, the player is given benefits such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls. (See Patent Document 1, for example).'' Regarding the background art that states, ``In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to increase the attention to the game.'' This was done with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repeat operation is terminated by the game time control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A special game state transition means (main controller 81's MPU 112 to execute the process of transitioning to the opening/closing execution mode),
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under a situation where a game repeat operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is being performed in the second gaming state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is made to the player to transition to the special gaming state before the game repeat operation is finished as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a suggesting means (a function of displaying "Preparing for V release" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to feature G1, in a game round that results in a winning result during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game recycle operation (before the game recycle operation ends), so that the special game state is entered. A special suggestion will be made regarding the transition to . By providing a relationship between the number of special information and special suggestions in this way, it is possible to encourage players who expect special suggestions to aim for reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that the special suggestion is configured to continue at least until the game repeat operation of the game round in which the special suggestion was started is completed.

As shown in this feature, by configuring the special suggestion to continue until the game replay operation of the relevant game cycle is completed, it is possible to suitably prevent the special suggestion from being overlooked.

Feature G3. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the game replay operation, the game reuse operation is performed for the game time in which the determination result by the special information determining means is the winning result in the second gaming state. The feature G1 or the feature G2 is characterized in that the special suggestion is not made even if the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under a certain situation. The game machine described.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably avoid, for example, the occurrence of a special suggestion immediately before the end of a game round. This is preferable in order to prevent players from being confused by the combination of notification of winning results and special suggestions.

Feature G4. If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state becomes the winning result, and the number of consecutive times the winning result occurs without transitioning to the first gaming state reaches a predetermined number, the special A first transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state after the gaming state ends (a function for transitioning to the third special gaming state by a limiter operation in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
If the determination result by the special information determining means during the second gaming state is the winning result, and the number of consecutive times the winning result is achieved without transitioning to the first gaming state has not reached the prescribed number of times, the A second transition means (a function of causing the MPU 112 of the main control device 81 to transition to the second special gaming state) for transitioning to the second special gaming state through the special gaming state,
As the suggestion mode of the special suggestion, a first suggestion mode and a second suggestion mode which are different in mode are provided,
The suggesting means is
In the second gaming state, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under a situation where a replay operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is being performed. means for making the special suggestion in the first suggestion mode when the consecutive number of times including the winning result reaches the specified number;
In the second gaming state, the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under a situation where a replay operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is being performed. and means for making the special suggestion in the first suggestion mode when the consecutive number of times including the winning result does not reach the specified number of times. The gaming machine described in item 1.

In a configuration (so-called limiter) in which the number of consecutive games is controlled by a specified number of times, the mode of the special suggestion is different depending on whether or not the limiter is activated, thereby making it easier to estimate the flow of the game from the special suggestion. This is preferable in order to alleviate the negative effects that occur in speeding up the game progress (game states changing one after another without the player's understanding catching up).

Feature G5. The game time control means has a period determining means for determining the operation period of the game time operation for each game time,
comprising a performance execution means for executing a performance in parallel with the game repetition operation when the game repetition operation is being performed,
One of the performances executed by the performance execution means is a special performance (special variable display) in which a predetermined performance (unit performance) configured such that the performance execution period is shorter than the operation period is executed multiple times. It is provided,
When the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit during the predetermined performance, the suggestion means starts the special suggestion until the timing when the subsequent predetermined performance is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to delay.

If the number of special information reaches the upper limit during execution of a predetermined effect, the special suggestion will be started in accordance with the start timing of the next predetermined effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the player's attention being diverted from the predetermined performance due to the special suggestion and the player overlooking the predetermined performance.

Feature G6. The suggestion means is capable of continuing the special suggestion over the performance execution period of the plurality of predetermined performances, and the suggestion mode of the special suggestion is changed from the previous predetermined performance to the next predetermined performance. The gaming machine according to feature G5, characterized by having a changing means for changing the game when the game is played.

As shown in feature G6, if the suggestion form of the special suggestion is changed in accordance with changes in the predetermined presentation, the cooperation between the predetermined presentation and the special suggestion can be strengthened.

Feature G7. The effect execution means includes a variable display means (symbol display device 41) that variably displays a pattern on a display screen (display screen G), and includes a variable display that variably displays a pattern on the display screen as the predetermined effect. including a stop display that stops displaying the pattern after the variable display;
The suggestion means is configured to make the special suggestion on the display screen, and includes means for reducing the display range in which the special suggestion is made in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature G5 or feature G6.

When the display screen is shared between a predetermined effect and a special suggestion, the display range of the special suggestion is reduced from the start of the special suggestion according to the progress of the predetermined effect, so that the predetermined effect and the special suggestion can be suitably used. They can coexist. This is preferable in order to strengthen the cooperation between the predetermined presentation and the special suggestion.

Feature G8. The suggestion means is configured to indicate that the number of special information stored in the special information storage means reaches the upper limit under a situation in which a replay operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is performed in the second gaming state. According to any one of features G5 to G7, the feature is configured to determine whether or not to make the special suggestion based on the remaining number of times of the predetermined effect in the relevant game round if The game machine described.

As shown in feature G5, etc., in a configuration in which a predetermined effect and a special suggestion are linked, a certain amount of time is required to effectively perform the link function. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which whether or not to give a special suggestion is determined according to the remaining number of predetermined performances when the upper limit is reached, it is possible to suitably prevent the above-mentioned cooperation function from not being effectively performed.

Feature G9. The suggestion means is configured to provide information at a timing when the number of special information reaches the upper limit (four) in a situation where a game repeat operation for a game that results in the winning result is being performed in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to start the special suggestion.

According to the configuration shown in feature G9, since special suggestions are immediately started when the number of special information reaches the upper limit, wasteful investment can be suitably suppressed.

Especially in combination with Feature G2 (a configuration in which the special suggestion continues until the end of the game round), the earlier the special information reaches the upper limit after the start of the game round, the longer the execution period of the special suggestion becomes. , it is possible to suitably prompt a player who wants to fully enjoy the special suggestion to shoot the game ball.

Feature G10. A first state (open state) that allows the ball to enter the starting ball entry section, and a second state (closed state) that makes it more difficult or impossible for the ball to enter the starting ball entry section than the first state. a variable mechanism (electric accessory 34a) that can be switched between
a switching control means for switching the variable mechanism between the first state and the second state (a function for executing processing for electric support in the MPU 112 of the main control device 81);
The switching control mode (support mode) by the switching control means includes a first switching mode (low-frequency support mode) and a second switching mode in which the mode of switching to the first state is more advantageous to the player than the first switching mode. mode (high frequency support mode).
Any one of features G1 to G9 characterized in that the switching control mode in the first gaming state is the first switching mode, and the switching control mode in the second gaming state is the second switching mode. The gaming machine described in item 1.

The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode and makes it easier to enter the starting ball entry section. By applying the technical idea shown in Feature G1 etc. to such a configuration, the hurdle to reaching the upper limit mentioned above can be lowered, and it can be avoided that there will be a large difference in the chances of special suggestions occurring depending on the player's skill level, etc. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature G11. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is terminated by the game repetition control means as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A first special game state transition means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that shifts the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on function to execute processing for transitioning to a special winning gaming state),
When a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special game state, a second special game state transition means (of the main controller 81) that transitions from the first special game state to the second special game state is provided. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under a situation where a game repeat operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is being performed in the second gaming state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is made to the player to transition to the special gaming state before the game repeat operation is finished as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a suggesting means (a function of displaying "Preparing for V release" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to feature G11, in a game round that results in a winning result during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game recycle operation (before the game recycle operation ends), so that the special game state is entered. A special suggestion will be made regarding the transition to . By providing a relationship between the number of special information and special suggestions in this way, it is possible to encourage players who expect special suggestions to aim for reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Feature G12. A game board (game board 24) in which a game area (game area PE) where game balls flow down is formed, and a game ball firing means (game ball firing mechanism 53) capable of firing game balls into the game area. A gaming machine with
a starting ball entry part (second operating port 34) provided in the gaming area;
Information acquisition means (a function for acquiring reservation information in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) for acquiring special information (reservation information) based on the ball entering the starting ball entry section;
special information storage means (a function of storing pending information in the RAM 114 of the main controller 81) capable of storing a plurality of pieces of special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Special information determining means (in the MPU 112 of the main controller 81) that sequentially determines whether or not the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information (for example, jackpot or special winning winning information) function to execute validity judgment processing, etc.);
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game repetition operation (fluctuation display of symbols) is started, and a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination is started. The notifying means ( A game time control means (a function for controlling the display of the operating port display section BS by the MPU 112 of the main control device 81) that controls the operating port display section BS);
The judgment result by the special information judgment means becomes the first result, which is the winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special judgment information, and the game turn control means causes the game turn to be announced as a notification result corresponding to the first result. A first special game state transition means (main) for shifting the game state from a predetermined game state to a first special game state (special winning game state) more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state based on the completion of the operation; (a function of executing processing for transitioning to a special winning game state in the MPU 112 of the control device 81);
If a predetermined transition condition (V winning) is satisfied during the first special gaming state, or a second game where the determination result by the special information determining means is a winning result (special winning result) corresponding to the special determination information. A second special game state transition means (of the main control device 81) that causes the game time to shift to a second special game state when the game time control means ends the game time operation as a notification result corresponding to the second result. The MPU 112 executes processing for transitioning to a jackpot gaming state).
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, a third special gaming state) and a second gaming state (for example, a second special gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
The number of special information stored in the special information storage means can be stored in the special information storage means under a situation where a game repeat operation of the game round resulting in the winning result is being performed in the second gaming state. When the upper limit (4) is reached, a special suggestion is made to the player to transition to the special gaming state before the game repeat operation is finished as a notification result corresponding to the winning result. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a suggesting means (a function of displaying "Preparing for V release" on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41).

According to feature G12, in a game round that results in a winning result during the second game state, the number of special information reaches the upper limit during the game recycle operation (before the game recycle operation ends), so that the special game state is entered. A special suggestion will be made regarding the transition to . By providing a relationship between the number of special information and special suggestions in this way, it is possible to encourage players who expect special suggestions to aim for reaching the upper limit. This is preferable in order to increase attention to the game.

Note that the technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G10 may be applied to the features G11 to G12.

Further, it is also possible to apply each of the technical ideas shown in the feature groups A to G to the features G1 to G12 detailed above.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: an operating means (launching handle 60) operated by a player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) that launches a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launched game ball A ball path (guiding rail 54) that guides the ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE), and game parts (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and among these game parts, a predetermined passing portion ( A gaming machine that provides a bonus to a player when a game ball passes through a general prize opening (31, etc.).

Reel-type gaming machines such as slot machines: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row at a final stop, and the symbols begin to fluctuate due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol row as a final stop; A special gaming state (bonus game, etc.), and further includes a throwing device that is provided with a ball tray and performs a throwing process of taking in game balls from the ball tray, and a putting device that puts out game balls to the ball tray. A game machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when a game ball is thrown into the game machine.

10... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 24... Game board, 32A... First variable winning device, 32B... Second variable winning device, 33... First operating port, 34... Second operating port, 34b... Electric accessory, 35... Thru gate, 41... Symbol display device, 43... Actuation opening display section, 44... Through gate display section, 53... Game ball firing mechanism, 60... Shooting handle, 81... Main control device, 82... Notification/performance Control device, 112...MPU, 113...ROM, 114...RAM, 212...display control device, 242...MPU, 356...V winning area, AE...execution area, AS...display section for first operating port, BS...second Display section for actuation port, G...Display screen, PE...Game area, RE...Holding area, Ra...Holding area for first actuation port, Rb...Holding area for second actuation port.

Claims (1)

A game machine comprising a game board in which a game area in which a game ball flows downward is formed, and a game ball firing means capable of firing a game ball into the game area,
a predetermined ball entry means provided in the gaming area;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the ball entering the predetermined ball entry means;
special information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
special information determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the special information storage means corresponds to special determination information;
Prior to the determination by the special information determining means or based on the determination being made by the special information determining means, a game recurring operation is started, and the game recurring operation is started as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. a game round control means that controls a notification means so that the game round operation is performed with the completion of the game round as one game round;
The game state is set to a predetermined value when the determination result by the special information determination means becomes a winning result corresponding to the special determination information, and the game repetition operation is ended as a notification result corresponding to the winning result by the game time control means. and means capable of transitioning from a gaming state to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state,
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
means capable of transitioning to the first gaming state when the number of times the game is executed in the second gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times without the winning result;
Equipped with
It is possible to execute a specific performance in a predetermined game round that corresponds to the predetermined number of times in the second gaming state and in which the determination result by the special information determining means is a non-winning result. ,
When transitioning from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, special information stored by the special information storage means during the second gaming state and transferred from the second gaming state to the first gaming state. It is structured so that the more special information carried over, the more advantageous it can be to the player.
means for causing a first performance to be executed in the predetermined game round when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has reached an upper limit;
means for executing a second performance in the predetermined game round when the number of special information stored in the special information storage means has not reached an upper limit;
Equipped with
The second performance includes the execution of a predetermined notification that can suggest the firing of a game ball toward the predetermined ball entering means, and the first performance does not include the execution of the predetermined notification. A gaming machine with special features.

Images